MARANTZ NR1711 - Home Theater

NR1711 - Home Theater MARANTZ - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free NR1711 MARANTZ in PDF.

📄 288 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice MARANTZ NR1711 - page 1
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type AV Surround Receiver
Brand Marantz
Model NR1711
Dimensions (W x H x D) 440 x 105 x 340 mm
Weight 8.3 kg
Power Consumption 250 W
Standby Power Consumption 0.1 W (normal standby)
Power Supply AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Amplifier Output 7 channels, 50 W per channel (8 Ω, 20 Hz - 20 kHz, 0.08% THD, 2ch drive)
Supported Audio Formats Dolby Atmos, DTS:X, DTS Virtual:X, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, PCM, FLAC, DSD, WAV, MP3, AAC
HDMI Inputs/Output 6 inputs (1 with 8K support) / 1 output (eARC)
Video Features 8K upscaling, Dolby Vision, HDR10+, HLG, HDCP 2.3, 4K/120Hz pass-through, VRR, ALLM, QFT
Wireless Connectivity Wi-Fi (802.11a/b/g/n), Bluetooth 4.2, AirPlay 2
Multi-Room Audio HEOS Built-in, ZONE2 pre-out or speaker output, All Zone Stereo
Speaker Impedance Range 4 – 16 Ω
Radio FM/AM tuner with RDS, Internet Radio
USB Input Front USB port for FAT32/NTFS drives
Phono Input Yes, MM cartridge compatible
Eco Mode Auto Eco Mode adjusts power based on volume
Setup Assistant On-screen guided setup for speakers and network
Remote Control RC042SR with learning capabilities
Warranty Standard manufacturer warranty (varies by region)

Frequently Asked Questions - NR1711 MARANTZ

How do I connect the Marantz NR1711 to my TV?
Use an HDMI cable from the HDMI MONITOR 1 output on the receiver to an HDMI input on your TV. If your TV supports ARC/eARC, enable HDMI Control in the receiver's menu. For non-ARC TVs, also connect an optical cable from TV to receiver.
Can I use the NR1711 with 4-ohm speakers?
Yes, but you need to set the impedance in the setup menu. Press and hold ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS on the front panel for 3 seconds, then press DIMMER three times, and select '4ohms' using ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO.
How do I connect Bluetooth headphones?
Go to General > Bluetooth Transmitter in the menu, set Transmitter to On, and choose Output Mode (Bluetooth+Speakers or Bluetooth Only). Then pair your headphones by selecting them from the Device List.
What is the difference between Dolby Atmos and DTS:X on this receiver?
Both are object-based audio formats for immersive sound. Dolby Atmos uses height virtualization and speaker virtualization for 3D audio; DTS:X offers similar object-based surround. The NR1711 supports both, and also DTS Virtual:X for non-height speaker setups.
How do I play music from my USB drive?
Insert a FAT32 or NTFS formatted USB drive into the front USB port. Press USB on the remote, browse the file list, select a song, and choose 'Play Now' to start playback.
Does the NR1711 support 8K video?
Yes, it has one dedicated 8K HDMI input (HDMI 6). To activate 8K, go to Video > 4K/8K Signal Format and set it to '8K Enhanced'. Use an Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable.
How do I update the firmware?
Connect the receiver to the internet via wired or Wi-Fi. Go to General > Firmware in the menu, then select 'Update' to check and install the latest version. You can also allow automatic updates.
What is the HEOS feature?
HEOS is a wireless multi-room system built into the NR1711. Using the HEOS app, you can group speakers, stream music from services like Spotify or Tidal, and play different music in different zones.
How do I set up a second zone (ZONE2)?
Connect speakers to the ZONE2 speaker terminals or use PRE OUT to a powered amplifier. In the menu, set Amp Assign to 'ZONE2'. Then press ZONE2 ON/OFF on the front panel to power the zone and select its source.
Why is my remote not working?
Check the batteries (insert correctly) and ensure nothing blocks the remote sensor on the front panel. If the receiver's remote sensor is disabled (Remote Lock), press and hold the MUTE and INFO buttons on the remote together to re-enable.

User questions about NR1711 MARANTZ

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Home Theater in PDF format for free! Find your manual NR1711 - MARANTZ and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. NR1711 by MARANTZ.

USER MANUAL NR1711 MARANTZ

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

MARANTZ NR1711 - 1

natural_image Vertical arrangement of electronic devices with no visible text or symbols

marantz®

AV Surround Receiver NR1711

Owner's Manual

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - AV Surround Receiver NR1711 - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - AV Surround Receiver NR1711 - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - AV Surround Receiver NR1711 - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Accessories 8 Inserting the batteries 9 Operating range of the remote control unit 9

Features 10 High quality sound 10 High performance 11 Easy operation 15

Part names and functions 16 Front panel 16 Display 19 Rear panel 21 Remote control unit 25

Connections

Speaker installation 29
Connecting speakers 36
Before connecting speakers 36
Speaker configuration and "Amp Assign" settings 40
Connecting 5.1-channel speakers 41
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers 42
Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Bi-amp connection of front speaker 48
Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speaker 49
Connecting multi-zone speakers 50
Connecting an external power amplifier 51

Connecting a TV 52 Connection 1: TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) 53 Connection 2: TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) 54 Connection 3: TV equipped without an HDMI connector 55 Connecting a playback device 56 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) 57 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player 58 Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K 59 Connecting a video camcorder or game console 60 Connecting a turntable 61 Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port 62 Connecting FM/AM antennas 63 Connecting to a home network (LAN) 65 Wired LAN 65 Wireless LAN 66 Connecting an external control device 67 REMOTE CONTROL jacks 67 DC OUT jack 68 Connecting the power cord 69

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connections - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connections - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connections - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Playback

Basic operation71
Turning the power on71
Selecting the input source71
Adjusting the volume72
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)72
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player72
Playing a USB memory device73
Playing files stored on USB memory devices74
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device77
Playing music from Bluetooth device78
Pairing with other Bluetooth devices79
Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device80
Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones81
Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones82
Reconnecting to a Bluetooth headphones83
Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones83
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts84
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts85
Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)87
RDS Search87
PTY Search88
TP Search89
Radio text89
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)90
Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)90
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)91
Listening to preset stations91
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)92
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)93
Cancelling Preset Skip94

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playback - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playback - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playback - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Listening to Internet Radio 95
Listening to Internet Radio 96
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 97
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 98
Getting the HEOS App 101
HEOS Account 102
Playing from streaming music services 103
Listening to the same music in multiple rooms 106
AirPlay function 110
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad 111
Playing iTunes music with this unit 111
Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple
synced devices (AirPlay 2) 112
Spotify Connect function 113
Playing Spotify music with this unit 113

Convenience functions 114
Adding to HEOS Favorites 115
Playing back HEOS Favorites 115
Deleting a HEOS Favorites 116
Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust) 117
Adjusting the tone (Tone) 118
Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select) 119
Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode) 120
Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) 121
Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset) 122
Selecting a sound mode 123
Selecting a sound mode 124
Direct playback 125
Pure Direct playback 125
Auto surround playback 126
Description of sound mode types 127
Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal 131
HDMI Control function 135
Setting procedure 135
Smart Menu function 136
Sleep timer function 138
Using the sleep timer 139

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Smart select function 140
Calling up the settings 141
Changing the settings 142
Panel lock function 143
Disabling all key button operations 143
Disabling all button operations except VOLUME 143
Canceling the Panel lock function 144
Remote lock function 145
Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit 145
Enabling the remote sensor function 145
Web control function 146
Controlling the unit from a web control 146
Playback in ZONE2 (Another room) 148
Connecting ZONE2 148
Playback in ZONE2 150

Settings

Menu map 152
Menu operations 156
Audio 157
Center Level Adjust 157
Subwoofer Level Adjust 157
Surround Parameter 158
M-DAX 161
Audio Delay 162
Volume 163
Audyssey ^® 164
Graphic EQ 166

Video 168
Picture Adjust 168
HDMI Setup 170
Output Settings 175
On Screen Display 178
Screen Saver 179
4K/8K Signal Format 180
HDCP Setup 181
TV Format 182
Inputs 183
Input Assign 183
Source Rename 186
Hide Sources 186
Source Level 186
Speakers 187
Audyssey® Setup 187
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup) 189
Error messages 195
Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings 196

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

5

MARANTZ NR1711 - Settings - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Settings - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Settings - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Manual Setup197
Amp Assign197
Speaker Config.198
Distances203
Levels204
Crossovers205
Bass206
Front Speaker207
Speaker Preset207
Network208
Information208
Connection208
Wi-Fi Setup209
Settings211
Network Control213
Friendly Name213
Diagnostics214
AirPlay214
HEOS Account215
You have not signed in215
You have already signed in215
General216
Language216
ECO216
Bluetooth Transmitter220
ZONE2 Setup221
Zone Rename222
Smart Select Names222
Trigger Out223
Front Display223
Firmware224
Information227
Usage Data229
Save & Load229
Setup Lock230
Reset230
Limiting the operating zone with the remote control231

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

6

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Tips

Tips233
Troubleshooting235
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off236
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit237
Display on this unit shows nothing237
No sound comes out238
Desired sound does not come out239
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs242
No video is shown on the TV243
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV245
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal245
AirPlay cannot be played back246
USB memory devices cannot be played back247
Bluetooth cannot be played back248
The Internet radio cannot be played back250
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back251
Various online services cannot be played252
The HDMI Control function does not work252
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network253
Update/upgrade error messages254
Resetting factory settings255
Resetting network settings256
Restoring the firmware to the factory defaults257

Appendix

About HDMI258
Relationship between video signals and monitor output262
Playing back a USB memory devices264
Playing back a Bluetooth device265
Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS266
Playing back Internet Radio267
Personal memory plus function267
Last function memory267
Explanation of terms268
Trademark information277
Specifications279
Index285

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

7

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product.

To ensure proper operation, please read this owner's manual carefully before using the product.

After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.

Accessories

Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 1Quick Start Guide Safety InstructionsMARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 2MARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 3Cautions on Using BatteriesMARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 4Notes on radioMARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 5Cable labels
MARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 6Power cord FM indoor antennaMARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 7MARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 8AM loop antennaMARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 9Sound calibration microphoneMARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 10Sound calibration microphone stand
MARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 11Remote control unit (RC042SR)MARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 12R03/AAA batteriesMARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 13External antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

8

MARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 14

MARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 15

MARANTZ NR1711 - Accessories - 16

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Inserting the batteries

1 Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Inserting the batteries - 1

2 Insert two batteries correctly into the battery compartment as indicated.

Batteries

3 Put the rear cover back on.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

9

MARANTZ NR1711 - Inserting the batteries - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Inserting the batteries - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Inserting the batteries - 5

NOTE

• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
- Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
- Do not use two different types of batteries.
- Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods.
- If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.

Operating range of the remote control unit

Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

Approx. 7 m 30° 30°

Features

High quality sound

• Powerful 7-channel Discrete Amplifier

Featuring a high-current discrete power amplifier section, enjoy exceptional sound for movies and music. Identical power on all seven channels at 50 W per channel (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz, 0.08 % T.H.D., 2ch. drive) with low-impedance drive capability delivers superb speaker control.

Auto Eco Mode adjusts power output to speakers based on volume level and on-screen eco meter, providing power consumption reduction in real-time without sacrificing superb Marantz sound.

• Dolby Atmos (p. 269)

This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos audio format. The placement or movement of sound is accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound field.

- Speaker Virtualizer (p. 160)

Speaker Virtualizer enables you to access a more immersive entertainment experience from traditional channel based speaker layouts through digital signal processing including Dolby Atmos height virtualization and surround virtualization.

  • Speaker Virtualizer is not for use when both height speakers and surround speakers are connected.
  • Height Virtualization may be applied when surround speakers are connected.

• DTS:X (p. 272)

This unit is equipped with the DTS:X decoder technology. DTS:X brings the home theater experience to new heights with its immersive object based audio technology which removes the bounds of channels. The flexibility of objects allows for sound to be scaled large or small and moved around the room with greater accuracy than ever before leading to a richer immersive audio experience.

• DTS Virtual:X (p. 272)

DTS Virtual:X technology features DTS's proprietary virtual height and virtual surround processing to deliver an immersive sound experience from any type of input source (stereo to 7.1.4 channel) and speaker configuration.

- DTS Virtual:X is not for use when Height speakers are connected.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

10

MARANTZ NR1711 - • DTS Virtual:X (p. 272) - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - • DTS Virtual:X (p. 272) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - • DTS Virtual:X (p. 272) - 3

High performance

• Masterful 8K HDMI Connectivity

This unit includes 6 HDMI inputs and 1 output for all your favorite sources.

In addition to 8K upscaling, all 6 HDMI inputs support Dolby Vision, HLG, HDR10, 4:4:4 Pure Color sub-sampling, 21:9 video, BT.2020 pass-through and current HDCP 2.3 copy-protection standard. One dedicated 8K HDMI input delivers the latest HDMI specifications, taking your home entertainment to the next level. Enjoy movies in crystal-clear 8K/60Hz picture quality with outstanding clarity and contrast with all of today's HDR video formats like HDR10+ and Dynamic HDR. This unit also provides the best lag-free gaming experience with 4K/120Hz pass-through, ALLM, VRR, and QFT support.

- HDCP 2.3

This unit is compatible with HDCP 2.3 copyright protection standard.

- Digital video processor upscales SD (resolution) or HD (720p/1080p) / 4K to 8K

MARANTZ NR1711 - - HDCP 2.3 - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Device"] -->|8K 8K Up to 1080p/4K 60Hz| B["Video Processor"]
    B -->|8K up scaling| C["8K Ultra HD Display"]

This unit is equipped with a 8K video upscaling function that allows SD (Standard Definition) or HD (High Definition)/4K 60Hz video to be output via HDMI at 8K (7680 × 4320 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high definition images for any video source.

- eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function compatibility The eARC function is compatible with conventional ARC function-compatible audio formats in addition to multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio formats a conventional ARC function cannot transmit.

Additionally, connecting to an eARC function-compatible television enables enjoyment of higher-quality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

11

MARANTZ NR1711 - - HDCP 2.3 - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - - HDCP 2.3 - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - - HDCP 2.3 - 4

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

- HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV devices (6 inputs, 1 output)

6/1

In Out

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Device 1"] --> C["Central Device"]
    B["Device 2"] --> C
    D["Device 3"] --> C
    E["Device 4"] --> C
    F["Device 5"] --> C
    G["Device 6"] --> C
    H["Device 7"] --> C
    I["Device 8"] --> C
    C --> J["Output Display"]

This unit is equipped with 6 HDMI inputs and 1 HDMI output enabling connection to various HDMI compatible devices such as Blu-ray Disc players, game consoles and HD video camcorders.

- The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to network functions such as Internet radio etc. (p. 110)

Illustration showing audio recording setup with speaker, device, and tablet connected to a microphone

You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC.

This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music library from an iPhone ^® , iPad ^® , iPod touch ^® or iTunes ^® .

• Supports AirPlay 2 ^® wireless audio

Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous playback.

This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

12

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 5

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

- Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks

This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as DSD (5.6 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality playback of high resolution files.

- Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out easily (p. 77)

Diagram illustrating audio recording and playback system with speaker, CD, and tablet interface

You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.

- Connect Bluetooth headphones

This unit can transmit Bluetooth so you can enjoy audio wirelessly through your Bluetooth headphones.

Playback can be performed using connected speakers and Bluetooth headphones simultaneously, or only using Bluetooth headphones.

Diagram showing audio equipment connections with speaker, audio jack, and headphones, each connected to a speaker with signal waves.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

13

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 5

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

• Multi-Room audio (p. 121)

【MAIN ZONE】
MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 6

natural_image Interior view of a smart home with connected devices and a TV (no visible text or symbols)

【ZONE2】
MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 7

natural_image 3D diagram showing two red objects with blue lights above a gray block, connected by a blue arrow (no text or symbols)

You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE and ZONE2.

In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same time. This is useful when you want to let the background music propagate throughout the whole house.

• Energy-saving design

This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce unnecessary power use.

- Compatible with the "Marantz 2016 AVR Remote" App* for performing basic operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or Android™ devices (Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)

marantz AVR

Along with many new features, the graphics and user interface have been completely overhauled. The new app gives you full control of this unit as well as access to its setup menu for detailed adjustments from your phones or tablets. "Marantz 2016 AVR Remote" App also gives you quick access to the receiver's status display, option menus, Marantz Blu-ray Disc player control, and online owner's manual for your convenience.

* Download the appropriate "Marantz 2016 AVR Remote" App for your iOS or Android devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) network that the iPad, iPhone or Android™ is connected to.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

14

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 9

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 10

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 11

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

• HEOS provides streaming music from your favorite online music sources

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 1

Diagram showing household connected devices with wireless signals, including HEOS and speakers

HEOS wireless multi-room sound system that enables you to enjoy your favorite music anywhere and everywhere around your home. By utilizing your existing home network and the HEOS App (available for iOS, Android and Amazon devices), you can explore, browse, and play music from your own music library or from many online streaming music services.

When multiple products with HEOS Built-in are connected to the same network, they can be grouped to play the same music on all products simultaneously, or different music can be played on each one.

Easy operation

  • "Setup Assistant" provides easy-to-follow setup instructions
    First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network, etc.
  • Easy to use Graphical User Interface
    This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved operability.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

15

MARANTZ NR1711 - Easy operation - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Easy operation - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Easy operation - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Part names and functions

Front panel
marantz MOYA PANE SELECTOR MOYA PANE MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA MOYA

For details, see the next page.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

16

MARANTZ NR1711 - Part names and functions - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Part names and functions - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Part names and functions - 4

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

marantz ⑧ ④ ⑤ ⑨

① Power operation button (⏻)

Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is located) on/off (standby). (☐ p. 71)

② Power indicator

This is lit as follows according to the power status:

  • Off: Power on
    • Red: Normal standby
  • Orange:

  • When "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On" (p. 170)

  • When "HDMI Control" is set to "On" (☐ p. 172)
  • When "Network Control" is set to "Always On" (p. 213)

③ INPUT SELECTOR knob

This selects the input source. (☐ p. 71)

4 M-DAX indicator

This lights when the M-DAX mode is selected. (p. 161)

⑤ Remote control sensor

This receives signals from the remote control unit. (p. 9)

6 Display

This displays various pieces of information. (P. 19)

⑦ PURE DIRECT indicator

This lights when the "Pure Direct" mode is selected as the sound mode. (17 p. 125)

8 VOLUME knob

This adjusts the volume level. (p. 72)

⑨ Headphones jack (PHONES)

This is used to connect headphones.

When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT connectors.

NOTE

- To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using headphones.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

17

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

marantz 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

⑩ SETUP MIC jack

This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone. (p. 190)

M-DAX button

This switches the M-DAX mode. (☐ p. 161)

⑫ ZONE2 ON/OFF button

This turns the power of ZONE2 (another room) on/off. (1- p. 150)

13 ZONE2 SOURCE button

This selects the input source for ZONE2. (1 p. 150)

14 INTERNET RADIO button

This switches the input source to "HEOS Music" – "Tuneln Internet Radio". (19 p. 95)

⑮ DIMMER button

Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (☐ p. 223)

16 STATUS button

Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the display.

⑰ SOUND MODE button

Switching the sound mode. (p. 123)

18 PURE DIRECT button

This switches the sound mode between Direct, Pure Direct and Auto surround.

  • "Direct playback" (125)
    • "Pure Direct playback" (p. 125)
  • "Auto surround playback" (p. 126)

⑲ USB port (←)

This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices). (1 p. 62)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

18

MARANTZ NR1711 - ⑲ USB port (←) - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ⑲ USB port (←) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ⑲ USB port (←) - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Display

AUTO HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG S.BACK D1 dts AUDYSSEY TUNED STEREO RDS SLEEP -107.8 dB MUTE PCM Z2 DIG. ANAL.

① Input mode indicators

These light according to the audio input mode settings of each input source. (127 p. 185)

② Surround back indicator

This lights when audio signals are being output from the surround back speakers. (p. 200)

③ Decoder indicators

These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or DTS decoder is running.

④ Audyssey® indicator

This lights when "MultEQ", "Dynamic EQ" or "Dynamic Volume" has been set up. (164)

⑤ Tuner reception mode indicators

These light up according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to "Tuner".

TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.

STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.

RDS: Lights up when receiving RDS broadcasts.

⑥ Sleep timer indicator

This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (☐ p. 138)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

19

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display - 4

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

AUTO HDMI DIGITAL ANALD 8.8ACK dts AUDYSSEY TUNED STEREO RDS SLEEP -0.08 1011 dB MUTE ECM 22 RIO AM.

⑦ Volume indicator
8 MUTE indicator

This blinks while the sound is muted. (p. 72)
9 Information display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.
⑩ Input signal indicators
The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal. (p. 185)
⑪ ZONE2 indicator
This lights up when ZONE2 (another room) power is turned on. (p. 150)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

20

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display - 6

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display - 7

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display - 8

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Rear panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 HDMI IN 4K / HDCP3.3 (MOMINABLE) 1 CDS OUT 2 DVD 3 Blu-g 4 MEMS PLAERS 5 SAME 6 BK IN HDMI OUT 4K / HDCP3.3 (MOMINABLE) 1 MONOLED ARC MWC AVOC IN AUDIO IN TRANSMI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI RADI

For details, see the next page.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

21

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display - 10

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display - 11

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display - 12

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix - 1

natural_image Internal view of a device chassis with multiple ports and connectors (no visible text or labels)

① Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors

Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (p. 66)

① Place the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity evenly over the screw terminal of rear.
② Turn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected.
③ Rotate the antenna upwards for best reception.

Diagram showing three-step assembly of a device with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating process flow.

② Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)

Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors.

  • "Connection 2: TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (1 p. 54)
  • "Connection 3: TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (p. 55)

③ NETWORK connector

Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN network. (p. 65)

④ REMOTE CONTROL jacks

Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this unit and external devices from a different room. (p. 67)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ④ REMOTE CONTROL jacks - 1

y Rear panel Re

Index

22

MARANTZ NR1711 - ④ REMOTE CONTROL jacks - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ④ REMOTE CONTROL jacks - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ④ REMOTE CONTROL jacks - 4

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Diagram of a device rack with labeled components and numbered parts, likely for industrial or electronic control.

⑤ HDMI connectors

Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.

  • "Connection 1: TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (p. 53)
  • "Connection 2: TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (p. 54)
  • "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (p. 57)
  • "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (p. 58)
  • "Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K" (p. 59)

6 DC OUT jack

Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function. (17 p. 68)

⑦ SIGNAL GND terminal

Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (p. 61)

⑧ FM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA)

Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (p. 63)

⑨ Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)

Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors.

  • "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (p. 57)
  • "Connecting a video camcorder or game console" (19 p. 60)
  • "Connecting a turntable" (p. 61)

⑩ PRE OUT connectors

Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or a power amplifier for ZONE2.

  • "Connecting the subwoofer" (p. 37)
  • "Connection 2: Connection using an external amplifier (ZONE2)" (p. 149)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

23

MARANTZ NR1711 - ⑩ PRE OUT connectors - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ⑩ PRE OUT connectors - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ⑩ PRE OUT connectors - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Diagram of industrial control panel with labeled components including switches, relays, and power connections

⑪ Video connectors (VIDEO)

Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors.

  • "Connection 3: TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (p. 55)
  • "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (1 p. 57)
  • "Connecting a video camcorder or game console" (p. 60)

⑫ Component video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO)

Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors.

  • "Connection 3: TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (p. 55)
  • "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (p. 58)

⑬ Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS)

Used to connect speakers. (1 p. 36)

⑭ AC inlet (AC IN)

Used to connect the power cord. (p. 69)

NOTE

- Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

24

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Remote control unit

ZONE SELECT POWER 1 MAX OK LEFT 2 ON/OFF DVD Mopy GAMES AIR MOSSER POTATO TV/AVIO RR TUNGER USB ED Bluetooth P/REND RUNNING ORDER 3 OFF/PAGE ECO WRITE VOLUME RIGHT OPTION 4 RISK ATTEN BACK WTP-UP TIME+ TIME+ SWUNT SELECT 1 2 3 4 SOUND MODE MOVE NAME GAME PURE PURE

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

25

MARANTZ NR1711 - Remote control unit - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Remote control unit - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Remote control unit - 4

① ZONE SELECT buttons

These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2) that is operated through the remote control unit.

  • "Playback in ZONE2" (p. 150)
  • "Menu operations" (p. 156)

② Input source select buttons

These selects the input source.

  • "Selecting the input source" (p. 71)
    • "Playback in ZONE2" (☐ p. 150)

③ Channel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE ▲▼)

These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages. (p. 91)

④ MUTE button (☐X)

This mutes the output audio.

  • "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)" (p. 72)
  • "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2)" (p. 151)

⑤ Information button (INFO)

This displays the status information on the TV screen. (☐ p. 228)

⑥ Cursor buttons (△▽◀▶)

These select items.

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

ZONE SELECT POWER MAX FIND GLEEP ON/OFF DVD Blanche RAME AIR MESH MOHOLE V/AUX OK TENDER USB CO Bluetooth P/ORD Printed MODE DCO CH/PAGE MUTE WELCOME R/R OFF/ER DATTEN DATA SET/IP TIME- TUBE+ 12 8 9 10 SUPPORT SELECT 1 2 3 4 MUSH MODE MOVE: MUSIC GAME PURE

⑦ BACK button

This returns to the previous screen.

⑧ System buttons

These perform playback related operations.

Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, -)

These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (p. 85)

⑨ SMART SELECT buttons (1 - 4)

These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (127 p. 140)

⑩ SOUND MODE buttons

These select the sound mode. (123)

⑪ Remote control signal transmitter

This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (1) p. 9

⑫ SLEEP button

This sets the sleep timer. (p. 138)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

26

MARANTZ NR1711 - ⑥ Cursor buttons (△▽◀▶) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ⑥ Cursor buttons (△▽◀▶) - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ⑥ Cursor buttons (△▽◀▶) - 4

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

ZONE SELECT POWER MAX ON/O HOLD ON/O DVD Blown MARE AUX METHI PUMBER VACOR HK TUNION USB CO Bluetooth FINDO TIMEPI RANGE DCO DH/PAGE MUTE WALONE RFX OPTION DOWN ATTEN BACK SET-UP TUBE - TUBE + SWART SELECT 1 2 3 4 MOUNT MOUNT GEAR PURE 13 14 15 16 17 18

⑬ POWER button (⏻)

This turns the power on/off.

  • "Turning the power on" (p. 71)
  • "Playback in ZONE2" (p. 150)

⑭ ECO Mode button (✗)

This switches to ECO Mode. (p. 216)

⑮ VOLUME buttons (▲▼)

These adjusts the volume level.

  • "Adjusting the volume" (p. 72)
  • "Adjusting the volume (ZONE2)" (p. 151)

⑯ OPTION button

This displays the option menu on the TV screen.

⑰ ENTER button

This determines the selection.

18 SETUP button

This displays the menu on the TV screen. (☐ p. 156)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

27

MARANTZ NR1711 - SETUP button - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - SETUP button - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - SETUP button - 3

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Contents

Speaker installation 29

Connecting speakers 36

Connecting a TV 52

Connecting a playback device 56

Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port 62

Connecting FM/AM antennas 63

Connecting to a home network (LAN) 65

Connecting an external control device 67

Connecting the power cord 69

NOTE

  • Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed. However, when the "Setup Assistant" is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") screen for making connections. (During "Setup Assistant" operation, the input/output connectors do not conduct current.)
  • Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.

■ Cables used for connections

Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to connect.

Speaker cable Subwoofer cable HDMI cable Component video cable Video cable Coaxial digital cable Optical cable Audio cable LAN cable

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

In

28

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Cables used for connections - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Cables used for connections - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Cables used for connections - 4

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Speaker installation

Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room. Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical installation.

SLSR FLFR SW1 C SW2 SBL SB SBR

FL/FR(Front speaker left/right):Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position. The distance between each speaker and your TV should also be the same.
C(Center speaker):Place the CENTER speaker in between the front speakers and above or below your TV.
SL/SR(Surround speaker left/right):Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an equal distance to the left and right sides of the main listening position. If you don't have surround back speakers, move the surround speakers slightly behind your listening position.
SBL/SBR(Surround back speaker left/right):Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position and directly behind the main listening position. When using a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly behind the listening position.
SW 1/2(Subwoofer):Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near the front speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place them asymmetrically across the front of your room.

Front panel Di

Rear panel Re

Index

29

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker installation - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker installation - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker installation - 4

Contents

ctions

settings Tips Appendix

TML TFL FHLFHR TMR TFR

FHL/FHR(Front height speaker left/right):Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the front speakers. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aim them towards the main listening position.
TFL/TFR(Top front speaker left/right):Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.
TML/TMR(Top middle speaker left/right):Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers directly above the main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

30

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker installation - 6

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker installation - 7

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker installation - 8

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

SDLSDR FDLFDR

FDL/FDR(Front Dolby speaker left/right):Place the FRONT Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on the front speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the front speaker.
SDL/SDR(Surround Dolby speaker left/right):Place the SURROUND Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on the surround speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the surround speaker.

About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow the sound to come from over your head by using a special upward-pointing speaker that is placed on the floor.

You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.

MARANTZ NR1711 - About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 1

natural_image Illustration of a person sitting on a chair facing a device with a light beam, no text or symbols present

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

31

MARANTZ NR1711 - About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 4

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

MARANTZ NR1711 - ayback Settings Tips Appendix - 1

  • This unit is compatible with Dolby Atmos and DTS:X which offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation.
  • The "Speaker Virtualizer" must be set to "On" for Dolby Atmos playback with 5.1-channel speaker configurations or less. (p. 160)
  • DTS:X can be selected regardless of the speaker configuration.
  • Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.

Top middle speaker Top front speaker Front height speaker • Point slightly downwards *3 *2 *1 Surround speaker Surround back speaker Front speaker [Viewed from the side]

*1: 30^-45^ *2: 30^-55^
*3: 65° - 100°

Height speakers layout
FHL FHR FL TFL C FR TFR TML SL TMR SR

[Viewed from the top]

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

32

MARANTZ NR1711 - ayback Settings Tips Appendix - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ayback Settings Tips Appendix - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - ayback Settings Tips Appendix - 6

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ When 7.1-channel speakers are installed using surround back speakers

FL FR SW C *1 *2 *3 SL SR Listening position SBL SBR *1 22° - 30° *2 90° - 110° *3 135° - 150°

■ When 5.1-channel speakers are installed

FL FR SW C *1 *2 SL SR *1 22° - 30° *2 120°

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ When 5.1-channel speakers are installed - 2

- When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening position.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

33

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ When 5.1-channel speakers are installed - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ When 5.1-channel speakers are installed - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ When 5.1-channel speakers are installed - 5

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Layout including height speakers and ceiling speakers

☐ Height speaker layout example Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front height speakers.

FHLFR SLSR FLFR SW C

☐ Ceiling speaker layout example Combination of 5.1-channel layout and top middle speakers.

TML TMR SLSR FLFR SW C

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

34

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ When 5.1-channel speakers are installed - 8

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ When 5.1-channel speakers are installed - 9

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ When 5.1-channel speakers are installed - 10

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

☐ Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front Dolby speakers.

SLSR FLDFR FLDRSW C

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

35

MARANTZ NR1711 - ☐ Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ☐ Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example - 3

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting speakers

Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.

Before connecting speakers

NOTE

  • Disconnect this unit's power plug from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer.
  • Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. ("Protection circuit" (125 p. 276))
  • Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock. When the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals while the "Setup Assistant" is running.)
  • Use speakers with an impedance of 4 – 16 Ω/ohms.

NOTE

- Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 – 6 Ω/ohms.

  1. Press and hold the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "V.Format:" appears on the display.
  2. Press DIMMER on the main unit three times. "Sp.Imp.:<8ohms>" appears on the display.
  3. Press ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO on the main unit to select the impedance.
8ohms(Default):Select when the impedance for all of the connected speakers is 8 Ω/ohms or over.
6ohms:Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 6 Ω/ohms.
4ohms:Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 4 Ω/ohms.
  1. Press the main unit's STATUS to complete the setting.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

36

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Connecting the speaker cables

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and – (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.

1 Peel off about 10 mm of sheathing from the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connecting the speaker cables - 1

2 Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connecting the speaker cables - 2

3 Insert the speaker cable's core wire to the hilt into the speaker terminal.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connecting the speaker cables - 3

4 Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connecting the speaker cables - 4

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

37

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connecting the speaker cables - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connecting the speaker cables - 6

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connecting the speaker cables - 7

■ Connecting the subwoofer

Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Two subwoofers can be connected to this unit.

The same signal is output from the respective subwoofer terminals.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connecting the subwoofer - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    SW1["SW1"] -->|Signal Line| Display1["Display Panel"]
    SW2["SW2"] -->|Signal Line| Display2["Display Panel"]
    Display1 -->|Control Signals| Display3["Display Panel"]
    Display2 -->|Control Signals| Display4["Display Panel"]
    Display3 -->|Control Signals| Display5["Display Panel"]
    Display4 -->|Control Signals| Display6["Display Panel"]
    Display5 -->|Control Signals| Display7["Display Panel"]
ContentsConnectionsPlaybackSettingsTipsAppendix

■ About the cable labels (supplied) for channel identification

The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is color-coded for each channel to be identifiable.

Attach the cable label corresponding to each speaker to each speaker cable.

This makes it easy to connect the correct cable to the speaker terminals on the rear panel.

Speaker Color
FRONT L White
FRONT R
CENTER
SURROUND L Light Blue
SURROUND R Blue
SURROUND BACK L Beige
SURROUND BACK R
FRONT HEIGHT L Beige
FRONT HEIGHT R
ZONE2 L Beige
ZONE2 R
TOP FRONT L Beige
TOP FRONT R
TOP MIDDLE L Beige
TOP MIDDLE R
FRONT DOLBY L Beige
FRONT DOLBY RBrown
SURROUND DOLBY LBeige
SURROUND DOLBY RBrown
SUBWOOFER 1Black
SUBWOOFER 2Black

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

38

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ About the cable labels (supplied) for channel identification - 1

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Attach the cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as shown in the diagram.

Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable.

Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal matches that of the cable label.

[How to attach the cable labels]
Speaker
FRONT This unit

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

39

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 2

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings

This unit has a built-in 7-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing the "Amp Assign" settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone playback. (p. 197)

Perform "Amp Assign" settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (p. 197)

Playback speaker and zone“Amp Assign” settingsConnection page
MAIN ZONE ZONE2
5.1-channel 2-channel (Pre-out) Can be set in all “Amp Assign” modes. 41
7.1-channel (surround back) 2-channel (Pre-out) Surround Back (Default) 42
7.1-channel (front height) 2-channel (Pre-out) Front Height 43
7.1-channel (top front) 2-channel (Pre-out) Top Front 44
7.1-channel (top middle) 2-channel (Pre-out) Top Middle 45
7.1-channel (front Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker)2-channel (Pre-out)Front Dolby46
7.1-channel (surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker)2-channel (Pre-out)Surround Dolby47
5.1-channel (bi-amp connection for front speaker)2-channel (Pre-out)Bi-Amp48
5.1-channel + second pair of front speaker2-channel (Pre-out)Front B49
5.1-channel2-channel (Speaker out)ZONE250

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings - 1

- The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

40

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings - 2

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting 5.1-channel speakers

This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.

FL SW C FR SL SR

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR"]
    B --> C["FL"]
    C --> D["C"]
    D --> E["S"]
    E --> F["R"]
    F --> G["S"]
    G --> H["L"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

41

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers - 5

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting 7.1-channel speakers

System for 7.1-channel surround playback.

■ Example connections when using surround back speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.

FL SW C FR SL SR SBR$BL

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround back speakers - 2

- Set "Assign Mode" to "Surround Back" in the menu. (p. 197)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround back speakers - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Switch"] --> B["FR"]
    A --> C["FL"]
    A --> D["C"]
    A --> E["S"]
    A --> F["R"]
    A --> G["SSBRS"]
    A --> H["BLL"]
    B --> I["Switch"]
    C --> J["Switch"]
    D --> K["Switch"]
    E --> L["Switch"]
    F --> M["Switch"]
    G --> N["Switch"]
    H --> O["Switch"]

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround back speakers - 4

- When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L terminal.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

42

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround back speakers - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround back speakers - 6

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround back speakers - 7

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Example connections when using front height speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front height speakers.

FHL FHR FL FR SW C SL SR

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front height speakers - 2

- Set "Assign Mode" to "Front Height" in the menu. (p. 197)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front height speakers - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["RF"]
    B --> C["FL"]
    C --> D["C"]
    D --> E["S"]
    E --> F["R"]
    F --> G["SFHRF"]
    G --> H["HLL"]
    H --> I["Ground"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

43

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front height speakers - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front height speakers - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front height speakers - 6

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Example connections when using top front speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with top front speakers.

TFL TFR SLSR FLFR SW C

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top front speakers - 2

- Set "Assign Mode" to "Top Front" in the menu. (p. 197)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top front speakers - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR"]
    B --> C["FL"]
    C --> D["C"]
    D --> E["S"]
    E --> F["R"]
    F --> G["STFRTFLL"]
    H["Power Supply"] --> I["Switch"]
    J["Ground"] --> K["Power Supply"]
    L["Power Supply"] --> M["Ground"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

44

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top front speakers - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top front speakers - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top front speakers - 6

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Example connections when using top middle speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with top middle speakers.

TML TMR SLSR FLFR SW C

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top middle speakers - 2

- Set "Assign Mode" to "Top Middle" in the menu. (p. 197)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top middle speakers - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR"]
    B --> C["FL"]
    C --> D["C"]
    D --> E["S"]
    E --> F["R"]
    F --> G["SMRTML"]
    G --> H["Ground"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

45

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top middle speakers - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top middle speakers - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using top middle speakers - 6

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Example connections when using front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

SLSR FDLFDR SWLFD C

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 2

- Set "Assign Mode" to "Front Dolby" in the menu. (p. 197)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR"]
    B --> C["FL"]
    C --> D["C"]
    D --> E["S"]
    E --> F["R"]
    F --> G["SFDRFDLL"]
    H["Power Meter"] --> I["Switch"]
    H --> J["Relay"]
    H --> K["Capacitor"]
    H --> L["Ground"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

46

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 6

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Example connections when using surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

SDL SDR SLSR FLFR SW C

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 2

- Set "Assign Mode" to "Surround Dolby" in the menu. (p. 197)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR"]
    B --> C["FL"]
    C --> D["C"]
    D --> E["S"]
    E --> F["R"]
    F --> G["SSDRSDIL"]
    H["Power meters"] --> I["Switch"]
    H --> J["Relay"]
    H --> K["Capacitor"]
    H --> L["Ground"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

47

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Example connections when using surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers - 6

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Bi-amp connection of front speaker

This system plays back 5.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality.

FL/R (BI-Amp)(BI-Amp) SW C SL SR

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Bi-amp connection of front speaker - 2

- Set "Assign Mode" to "Bi-Amp" in the menu. (p. 198)

NOTE

- When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker's woofer and tweeter terminals.

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["Switch"]
    B --> C["Relays (R) (L)"]
    C --> D["FR"]
    C --> E["FL"]
    C --> F["RL"]
    C --> G["C"]
    C --> H["S"]
    C --> I["R"]
    C --> J["S"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

In

48

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 4

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speaker

This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.

FL (B) A FL FR (A) B FR SW C SL SR

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speaker - 2

- Set "Assign Mode" to "Front B" in the menu. (p. 198)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speaker - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FL (A) FR (A) C SR SL FR (B) FL (B)"]
    B --> C["Display Unit"]
    C --> D["Switch"]
    D --> E["Power Supply"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

In

49

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speaker - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speaker - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting 5.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speaker - 6

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting multi-zone speakers

■ 5.1-channel (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel (ZONE2) speaker connection

This connection method constructs a 5.1-channel speaker system in the MAIN ZONE and a 2-channel system in ZONE2.

MAIN ZONE FL FR SW C SL SR ZONE2 ZONE2 L ZONE2 R

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ 5.1-channel (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel (ZONE2) speaker connection - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR"]
    B --> C["FL"]
    C --> D["C"]
    D --> E["S"]
    E --> F["R"]
    F --> G["ZONE2 R"]
    F --> H["ZONE2 L"]
    I["Switch"] --> J["Relay 1"]
    I --> K["Relay 2"]
    I --> L["Relay 3"]
    I --> M["Relay 4"]
    I --> N["Relay 5"]
    I --> O["Relay 6"]
    I --> P["Relay 7"]
    I --> Q["Relay 8"]

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ 5.1-channel (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel (ZONE2) speaker connection - 3

- Set "Assign Mode" to "ZONE2" in the menu. (1 p. 198)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

50

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ 5.1-channel (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel (ZONE2) speaker connection - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ 5.1-channel (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel (ZONE2) speaker connection - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ 5.1-channel (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel (ZONE2) speaker connection - 6

Contents

Connections

Byback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting an external power amplifier

You can use this unit as a pre-amp for front channels by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. By adding a power amplifier to front channels, the realness of the sound can be further enhanced.

Subwoofer (Primary) — — SUB- WOOFER 1 Power amplifier — AUDIO — FRONT L R Subwoofer (Secondary) — AUDIO/AUDIO SUB- WOOFER 2

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

51

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting an external power amplifier - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting an external power amplifier - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting an external power amplifier - 4

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting a TV

Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit.

How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.

ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a TV - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?"] --> B{Yes}
    B --> C["Is the TV compatible with the ARC / eARC?"]
    C -->|Yes No| D["No"]
    C -->|No| E["End"]

"Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (p. 53)
"Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (p. 54)
"Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (p. 55)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

52

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a TV - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a TV - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a TV - 4

Contents

Connections

Byback Settings Tips Appendix

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)

Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC / eARC function to this unit.

Set "HDMI Control" to "On" or "ARC" to "On" when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (p. 172)

Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of "HDMI Control" and "ARC" settings in the menu.

TV HDMI IN (ARC / aARC)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) - 2

  • When using the ARC / eARC function, connect to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.
  • eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this setting exists on your television. For more information, check your television's owner's manual.
  • When an ARC and eARC function-compatible television is connected, the eARC function is prioritized.
  • Use a "High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet" when using an ARC / eARC function-compatible television.
  • Use an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable" to enjoy 8K video.
  • Set "4K/8K Signal Format" to "8K Enhanced" in the menu to enjoy 8K video. (125 p. 180)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

53

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) - 5

Contents

Connections

Byback Settings Tips Appendix

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)

Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit.

To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

TV OUTIN OPTICAL OUT HDMI IN

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

54

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) - 4

Contents

Connections

Byback Settings Tips Appendix

Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector

Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit.

To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

TV OUT IN OPTICAL OUT VIDEO IN COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y Pe Pft or

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

55

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector - 4

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting a playback device

This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors (HDMI, digital audio and audio).

Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.

If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections.

In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.

  • "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (p. 57)
  • "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (p. 58)
  • "Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K" (p. 59)
  • "Connecting a video camcorder or game console" (1章 p. 60)
  • "Connecting a turntable" (p. 61)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a playback device - 1

  • Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
  • The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See "Input Assign" on how to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (17 p. 183)
  • To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" to "TV". (17 p. 170)
    • To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

56

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a playback device - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a playback device - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a playback device - 4

Contents

Connections

Byback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)

This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example.

Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

(HDMI incompatible device) Satellite tuner / Cable TV AUDIO AUDIO OUT R L VIDEO VIDEO OUT Satellite tuner / Cable TV HDMI OUT

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

57

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) - 3

Contents

Connections

Byback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player

This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player as an example.

Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

(HDMI incompatible device) DVD player VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y PS PR DVD player HDMI OUT Blu-ray Disc player HDMI OUT

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

58

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player - 3

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K

This unit supports 8K HDMI video signals.

If your player supports 8K, connect it to the HDMI 6 (8K) connector on your device.

8K player HCM OUT

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K - 2

  • To enjoy 8K video, connect an 8K-compatible TV with an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable".
  • Set "4K/8K Signal Format" to "8K Enhanced" in the menu to enjoy 8K video. (10 p. 180)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

59

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K - 5

Contents

Connections

Byback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a video camcorder or game console

This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example. Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.

Video camcorder AUDIO AUDIO OUT R L VIDEO VIDEO OUT

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

60

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a video camcorder or game console - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a video camcorder or game console - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a video camcorder or game console - 4

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a turntable

This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.

If you set this unit's input source to "Phono" and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise from the speakers.

Turntable (MM cartridge) GND AUDIO OUT

NOTE

- The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

61

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port

For operating instructions see "Playing a USB memory device" (p. 73).

USB memory device

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port - 2

- Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use that device's supplied AC adapter.

NOTE

• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
- It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit's USB port to a PC via a USB cable.
- Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

62

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting FM/AM antennas

Connect the antenna, tune in to a broadcast and then move the antenna to the location where there is least noise. Then use tape, etc. to fix the antenna in this location. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (1 p. 84))

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting FM/AM antennas - 1

- If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.

NOTE

- Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.

AM loop antenna (supplied) ① ② ③ FM indoor antenna (supplied) Black White

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

63

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 4

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Using the AM loop antenna

Suspending on a wall

Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Using the AM loop antenna - 1
Nail, tack, etc.

Standing alone

Use the procedure shown above to assemble.

When assembling, refer to "AM loop antenna assembly".

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Using the AM loop antenna - 2

■ AM loop antenna assembly

1 Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
2 Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the stand.

Loop antenna Stand Square hole Projecting part

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ AM loop antenna assembly - 2

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

64

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ AM loop antenna assembly - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ AM loop antenna assembly - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ AM loop antenna assembly - 5

Contents

Connections

Byback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting to a home network (LAN)

This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN.

You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various types of playback and operations as described below.

  • Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media server(s)
  • Playback of streaming music services
    • Using the Apple AirPlay function
    • Operation on this unit via the network
    • Operation with the HEOS wireless multi-room sound system
  • Firmware Update

For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.

Wired LAN

To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the router to this unit as shown in the figure below.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Wired LAN - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Internet"] -->|Modem| B["PC"]
    B --> C["LAN port / Ethernet connector"]
    C --> D["NAS (Network Attached Storage)"]
    E["Router"] --> F["To LAN port"]
    F --> G["To LAN port"]
    G --> H["To WAN side"]
    H --> I["Modem"]
    I --> J["PC"]
    K["Net"] --> L["Server"]
    M["Computer"] --> N["PC"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

65

MARANTZ NR1711 - Wired LAN - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Wired LAN - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Wired LAN - 4

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Wireless LAN

When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel and stand them upright.

See "Wi-Fi Setup" on how to connect to a wireless LAN router. (K 209)

Internet Modem To WAN side Router with access point

MARANTZ NR1711 - Wireless LAN - 2

- When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions:

• Built-in DHCP server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
- Built-in 100BASE-TX switch When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
- Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
- The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended. If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be affected by noise.
- When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the IP address, etc. in "Network". (17 p. 208)

NOTE

  • The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a computer shop for details.
  • This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
  • Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet connector on your computer.
  • Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

66

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting an external control device

REMOTE CONTROL jacks

■ Performing operations by RC on this unit without visual contact

You can connect an external IR receiver to the REMOTE CONTROL connectors to perform operations on this unit with the supplied remote control unit without visual contact. This might be necessary if the unit is hidden in a cupboard or corner, so you can't directly point with the remote control unit to the device.

To do this, disable the remote control signal receiving function ("Remote lock function" (p. 145)).

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Performing operations by RC on this unit without visual contact - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["IR receiver"] --> B["RC OUT"]
    A --> C["RESET CONTROL"]
    C --> D["Output Device"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

NOTE

- When the remote control signal receiving function is disabled, you can not perform operations with the remote control unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

67

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Remote Control"] --> B["OUT"]
    C["Remote Control"] --> D["IN"]
    C --> E["OUT"]
    F["External Module"] --> G["INT."]
    F --> H["EXT."]
    I["External Module"] --> J["INT."]
    I --> K["EXT."]
    L["External Module"] --> M["INT."]
    L --> N["EXT."]
    O["External Module"] --> P["INT."]
    O --> Q["EXT."]
    R["External Module"] --> S["INT."]
    R --> T["EXT."]
    U["External Module"] --> V["INT."]
    U --> W["EXT."]

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 4

Contents

Connections

Byback Settings Tips Appendix

DC OUT jack

When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device's power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit. The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC/150 mA electrical signal.

12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device

NOTE

  • Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the DC OUT jack. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable.
  • If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the power to the unit, and disconnect it.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

68

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting the power cord

After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.

To household power outlet (AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz) Power cord (supplied)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

69

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting the power cord - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting the power cord - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connecting the power cord - 4

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Contents

Basic operation

Turning the power on 71
Selecting the input source 71
Adjusting the volume 72
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 72
Selecting a sound mode 123

Playback a device

Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 72
Playing a USB memory device 73
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 77
Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones 81
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 84

Playback network audio/service

Listening to Internet Radio 95
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 97
Getting the HEOS App 101
AirPlay function 110
Spotify Connect function 113

Convenience functions

Convenience functions 114
HDMI Control function135
Smart Menu function136
Sleep timer function 138
Smart select function140
Panel lock function143
Remote lock function145

Other functions

Web control function146
Playback in ZONE2 (Another room)148

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

70

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents - 1

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Basic operation

Input source select buttons MUTE× POWER ⏻ VOLUME ▲▼

Turning the power on

1 Press POWER ⏻ to turn on power to the unit.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press POWER ⏻ to turn on power to the unit. - 1

  • You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to turn on the power.
  • You can also switch the power to standby by pressing ⏻ on the main unit.

Selecting the input source

1 Press the input source select button to be played back. The desired input source can be selected directly.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press the input source select button to be played back. The desired input source can be selected directly. - 1

- You can also select the input source by turning INPUT SELECTOR on the main unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

71

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press the input source select button to be played back. The desired input source can be selected directly. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press the input source select button to be played back. The desired input source can be selected directly. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press the input source select button to be played back. The desired input source can be selected directly. - 4

Adjusting the volume

1 Use VOLUME ▲▼ to adjust the volume.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use VOLUME ▲▼ to adjust the volume. - 1

  • The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting.
  • You can also adjust the master volume by turning VOLUME on the main unit.

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)

1 Press MUTE 📄X.

  • MUTE indicator on the display flashes.
  • 📄X appears on the TV screen.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press MUTE 📄X. - 1

  • The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (16 p. 163)
  • To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE 📄X again.
  • If X is displayed on the TV screen for more than 5 minutes when the "Screen Saver" is set to "On", the X symbol moves randomly over the TV screen. (p. 179) (This feature will be supported via firmware update.)

Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player

The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player.

1 Prepare for playback.

① Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.
② Change the TV input to the input of this unit.

2 Press POWER ⏻ to turn on power to the unit.
3 Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a player used for playback.
4 Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.

■ Surround playback (p. 123)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

72

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player - 3

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playing a USB memory device

USB CH/PAGE ▲▼ △▽◀ ▷ ENTER BACK OPTION BACK ▶/||

  • Playing back music files stored on a USB memory device.
  • Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards can be played on this unit.
  • This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in "FAT32" or "NTFS" format.
  • The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows.
    See "Playing back a USB memory devices" (☐ p. 264) for details.
  • WMA
    • MP3
    • WAV
  • MPEG-4 AAC
  • FLAC
  • Apple Lossless
    • DSD

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

73

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing a USB memory device - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing a USB memory device - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing a USB memory device - 4

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playing files stored on USB memory devices

1 Insert a "FAT32" or "NTFS" formatted USB memory device into the USB port.
2 Press USB to switch the input source to "USB".
3 Select the name of this unit.

4 Browse the music on your USB memory device and select something to play.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music on your USB memory device and select something to play. - 1

- When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now:Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Now & Replace Queue:Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Next:Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.

Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.

USB Music - Nature User #1 Play New Play New & Movie Queue Play New Edit at End of Queue Created Nature 05 Various Articles

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

74

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music on your USB memory device and select something to play. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music on your USB memory device and select something to play. - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music on your USB memory device and select something to play. - 5

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

5 Use △▽ to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now & Replace Queue", then press ENTER.

Playback starts.

NOW PLAYING Nature Nature 01 - Various Artists -2212:45

Operation buttonsFunction
▶/■Playback / Pause
I◀◀ ▶▶Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE ▲▼Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use △▽ to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now &amp; Replace Queue", then press ENTER. - 2

- When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.

NOTE

  • Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.
  • When a USB memory device is connected to this unit, the unit loads all of the files on the USB memory device. Loading may take a while if the USB memory device contains a large number of folders and/or files.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

75

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

  • "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (p. 117)
  • "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (☐ p. 118)
  • "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (p. 119)
  • "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (p. 121)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

76

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device

POWER Bluetooth OPTION BACK

Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting this unit with the Bluetooth device.

Communication is possible up to a range of about 30 m.

NOTE

- To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to support the A2DP profile.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

77

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Playing music from Bluetooth device

In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth device must first be paired with this unit.

Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired again.

1 Prepare for playback.

① Connect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors on the rear panel. (1) p. 22
② Press POWER ⏻ to turn on power to the unit.

2 Press Bluetooth.

When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode automatically and "Pairing..." will appear on the display of the unit.

3 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.

4 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device.

Connect to the Bluetooth device while "Pairing" is being displayed on the display of the unit.

Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit (about 1 m).

5 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.

  • The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote control of this unit.
  • The next time the Bluetooth button is pressed on the remote control unit, this unit automatically connects to the last Bluetooth device that was connected.
Operation buttonsFunction
▶/IIPlayback / Pause
I◀◀ ▶▶Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

MARANTZ NR1711 - Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device. - 1

- Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title name, Artist name, Album name, etc.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

78

MARANTZ NR1711 - Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device. - 4

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Pairing with other Bluetooth devices

Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.

1 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.
2 Press and hold Bluetooth on the remote control unit for at least 3 seconds.
This unit will go into the pairing mode.
3 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Pairing with other Bluetooth devices - 1

  • This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered device.
  • You can also enter pairing mode by pressing the OPTION button when the Bluetooth playback screen is displayed and selecting "Pairing Mode" from the displayed option menu.

NOTE

  • To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
  • The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices.
  • Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

  • "Pairing with other Bluetooth devices" (p. 79)
  • "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (17 p. 117)
  • "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (12 p. 118)
  • "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (p. 119)
  • "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (p. 121)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

79

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 3

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device

After pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device can be connected without performing any operations on this unit.

This operation also needs to be performed when switching the Bluetooth device for playback.

1 If a Bluetooth device is currently connected, deactivate the Bluetooth setting of that device to disconnect it.
2 Activate the Bluetooth setting of the Bluetooth device to be connected.
3 Select this unit from the Bluetooth device list on your Bluetooth device.
4 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device - 1

  • The screen automatically switches to the "Bluetooth" playback screen if a Bluetooth device is connected while the power of this unit is on.
  • When the "Network Control" setting of this unit is set to "Always On" and a Bluetooth device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be turned on automatically. (tF p. 213)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

80

MARANTZ NR1711 - Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device - 3

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones

You can listen to audio playing through the MAIN ZONE of this unit on Bluetooth headphones.

Output audio from connected speakers and Bluetooth headphones simultaneously, or only using Bluetooth headphones.

Diagram showing audio equipment connections with speaker, headphones, and audio jack, each connected to a speaker with visible sound waves.

(Output Mode: Bluetooth + Speakers) (Output Mode: Bluetooth Only)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

81

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones - 4

Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones

1 Set "Transmitter" to "On" from the "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter" setting in the menu. (p. 220)
2 Select "Output Mode", and set audio output method.

Bluetooth + Speakers(Default):Audio is output to Bluetoothheadphones and main zone speakers.This simultaneous output is suitable forfamily movie night and other groupactivities.
Bluetooth Only:Audio is output to Bluetoothheadphones only.This is suitable for listening to music orwatching movies by yourself at nightwhen you need to keep quiet.

3 Enter pairing mode on the Bluetooth headphones you want to connect to this unit.
4 Select "Device List" and select the name of the Bluetooth headphones from the device list.
5 Adjust the volume of connected Bluetooth headphones after the connection is completed.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones - 1

  • "Output Mode" can also be set from "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the option menu.
  • A2DP profile-compatible Bluetooth speakers can be connected following the same steps used to connect Bluetooth headphones.

NOTE

  • Bluetooth headphones volume cannot be adjusted from this unit. Adjust volume of your Bluetooth headphones.
  • Stereo mode is fixed as the sound mode when using Bluetooth headphones. Any sound modes and other audio settings are not reflected in audio output on Bluetooth headphones.
    Audio settings, sound modes and All Zone Stereo mode are not available while using Bluetooth headphones and "Output Mode" is set to "Bluetooth Only".
    • Audio may be delayed when sent over Bluetooth.
  • Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected when use a Bluetooth input source in any zone.
    Furthermore, selecting a Bluetooth input source in any zone will terminate the connection between this unit and Bluetooth headphones.
  • Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected when this unit is grouped in the HEOS App.

CAUTION:

Using Bluetooth headphones without a volume adjustment function

  • In order to avoid hearing loss, do not connect Bluetooth headphones that lack volume adjustment functionality.
  • Bluetooth headphone volume may be unexpectedly loud when this unit connects to Bluetooth headphones.
  • Bluetooth headphone volume cannot be adjusted from this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

82

MARANTZ NR1711 - Using Bluetooth headphones without a volume adjustment function - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Using Bluetooth headphones without a volume adjustment function - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Using Bluetooth headphones without a volume adjustment function - 3

Reconnecting to a Bluetooth headphones

Follow any of the steps below to reconnect the most recently used Bluetooth headphones:

  • Reconnect to this unit with Bluetooth headphone's reconnect function.
  • Go to "Bluetooth Transmitter" and then select "Reconnect" within the options menu.
  • If "Output Mode" is set to "Bluetooth + Speakers", this unit will automatically connect to the most recently used Bluetooth headphones when power is turned on.
  • Select the device you wish to connect from the "Device List" under "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the menu.

Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones

Complete any of the following steps to disconnect your Bluetooth headphones:

  • Turn off your Bluetooth headphones.
  • Go to "Bluetooth Transmitter" and then select "Disconnect" within the options menu.
  • In the setup menu, go to "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter", and set "Transmitter" to Off. (1 p. 220)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

83

MARANTZ NR1711 - Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

TUNER CH/PAGE ▲▼ CH/PAGE OPTION ENTER BACK TUNE +,-

You can use the built-in tuner of this unit to listen to FM broadcasts and AM broadcasts.

Make sure the FM antenna and AM loop antenna are connected to this unit first.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

84

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to FM/AM broadcasts - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to FM/AM broadcasts - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to FM/AM broadcasts - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

1 Connect the antenna. ("Connecting FM/AM antennas" (p. 63))
2 Press TUNER to switch the input source to "Tuner".

[TV screen]
Tuner CH 1 FM B7.50MHz Tune Preset Option STUDIO Player Now Playing OFF/OKS

[Display of this unit]
MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to FM/AM broadcasts - 2

3 Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

4 Use to select “FM/AM”, then press ENTER.

This displays the reception band input screen.

5 Use ◀▷ to select "FM" or "AM", then press ENTER.

FM: When listening to an FM broadcast.

AM: When listening to an AM broadcast.

6 Press TUNE + or TUNE – to select the station you want listen to.

Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to FM/AM broadcasts - 3

- The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of "Auto" mode that automatically searches available broadcast stations and "Manual" mode that lets you tune in using buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is "Auto". You can also use "Direct Tune" to tune in by entering the frequency directly. In "Auto" mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good. If this is the case, then use the "Manual" mode or "Direct Tune" mode to tune in.

Operation buttons Function
TUNE +, – Selects the radio station (up/down)

CH/PAGE ▲▼Selects preset radio stations
△▽Selects the radio station (up/down)
◀▷Selects preset radio stations

Front panel Di

Rear panel Re

Index

85

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to FM/AM broadcasts - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to FM/AM broadcasts - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to FM/AM broadcasts - 6

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

  • "Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)" (v p. 87)
    • "RDS Search" (v p. 87)
  • "PTY Search" (v p. 88)
  • "TP Search" (v p. 89)
    • "Radio text" (v p. 89)
  • "Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)" (v p. 90)
  • “Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)” (v p. 90)
  • "Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)" (v p. 91)
  • "Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)" (v p. 92)
  • "Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)" (v p. 93)
  • "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 117)
  • "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 118)
  • "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 119)
  • "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 121)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

86

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 2

Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)

You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Direct Tune”, then press ENTER. The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
3 Use to select a number, then press . • If is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
4 Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio station you want to hear.
5 When setting is completed, press ENTER. The preset frequency is tuned in.

RDS is a broadcasting service which allows a station to send additional information along with the regular radio program signal. Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide the RDS service. Note that the RDS function only works when receiving RDS compatible stations.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.

2 Use to select “RDS Search”, then press ENTER.

3 Press ENTER. The search for RDS stations begins automatically.

MARANTZ NR1711 - RDS Search - 1

- If you use ◀▷ within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the display, you can search for a different station.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

87

MARANTZ NR1711 - RDS Search - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - RDS Search - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - RDS Search - 4

Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated program type (PTY).

PTY identifies the type of RDS program.

The program types and their displays are as follows:

NEWSNewsWEATHERWeather
AFFAIRSCurrent AffairsFINANCEFinance
INFOInformationCHILDRENChildren's program
SPORTSportsSOCIALSocial Affairs
EDUCATEEducationRELIGIONReligion
DRAMADramaPHONE INPhone In
CULTURECultureTRAVELTravel
SCIENCEScienceLEISURELeisure
VARIEDVariedJAZZJazz Music
POP MPop MusicCOUNTRYCountry Music
ROCK MRock MusicNATION MNational Music
EASY MEasy Listening MusicOLDIESOldies Music
LIGHT MLight ClassicalFOLK MFolk Music
CLASSICSSerious ClassicalDOCUMENTDocumentary
OTHER MOther Music

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner".

The option menu screen is displayed.

2 Use to select "PTY Search", then press ENTER.

3 Use to call out the desired program type.

4 Press ENTER.

PTY search begins automatically.

MARANTZ NR1711 - PTY Search - 1

- If you use ◀ ▷ within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the display, you can search for a different station.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

88

MARANTZ NR1711 - PTY Search - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - PTY Search - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - PTY Search - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements.

This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your area before leaving home.

Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting traffic programs (TP stations).

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner".

The option menu screen is displayed.

2 Use to select “TP Search”, then press ENTER.

3 Press ENTER.

TP search begins automatically.

MARANTZ NR1711 - TP Search - 1

- If you use ◀ ▷ within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the display, you can search for a different station.

Radio text

RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the display. "Radio text" appears on the display when radio text data is received.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Radio text”, then press ENTER.
3 Use ◀▷ to select "On", then press ENTER.

  • While receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data broadcast from the station is displayed.
  • If no text data is being broadcast, "NO TEXT DATA" is displayed.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

89

MARANTZ NR1711 - Radio text - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Radio text - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Radio text - 3

Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)

You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you cannot tune in automatically with "Auto" mode, change the mode to "Manual" and tune in manually.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Tune Mode”, then press ENTER.
3 Use ◀▷ to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.

Auto:Automatically search for and tune to a receivable radio station.
Manual:Manually change the frequency one step at a time each time the button is pressed.

Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)

A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press ENTER.
3 Press ENTER.
The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset them.
- When presetting is completed, "Completed" is displayed for about 5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory) - 1

- The preset memory is overwritten.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

90

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory) - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory) - 4

Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)

Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily.

Up to 56 stations can be preset.

1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (p. 85))

2 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.

3 Use to select “Preset Memory”, then press ENTER. The list of already preset channels is displayed.

4 Use to select the channel you want to preset, then press ENTER.

The current broadcast station that is preset. - To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.

Channel Default settings
1 – 887.50 / 89.10 / 98.10 / 108.00 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 MHz
9 – 1690.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 MHz
17 – 2490.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 MHz
25 – 3290.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 MHz
33 – 4090.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 MHz
41 – 4890.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 MHz
49 – 5690.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 MHz

Listening to preset stations

1 Use CH/PAGE ▲▼ to select the desired preset channel.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

91

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to preset stations - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to preset stations - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to preset stations - 3

Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)

You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it. Up to 8 characters can be input.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Preset Name”, then press ENTER. The “Preset Name” screen is displayed.
3 Use ◀▷ to select the group of the broadcast station you want to name.
4 Use to select the broadcast station you want to name, then press ENTER.

5 Use to select a name label, then press ENTER.

The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed.

- If you select "Set Defaults", then the unit returns to displaying the frequency.

6 Enter the characters, then press "OK".

7 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

92

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press OPTION to return to the previous screen. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press OPTION to return to the previous screen. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press OPTION to return to the previous screen. - 3

Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)

Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier by skipping unnecessary memories.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner".

The option menu screen is displayed.

2 Use to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.

The "Preset Skip" screen is displayed.

3 □ To set the stations you want to skip by groups

① Use ◀ ▷ to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip.
② Press to select “Set No.* - * to Skip”, then press ENTER. Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the selected group “*-*”.
(* is the selected group number.)

☐ To set the stations you want to skip by stations

① Use ◀▷ to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip.
② Use to select the broadcast station you want to skip.
③ Use ◀ ▷ to select "Skip".
The station you selected is not displayed.

4 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

93

MARANTZ NR1711 - Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Cancelling Preset Skip

1 While the "Preset Skip" screen is displayed, use ◀ to select a group containing a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
2 Use to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
3 Use ◀▷ to select "On".
The skip is cancelled.

NOTE

- "Preset Skip" cannot be cancelled for groups.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

94

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Listening to Internet Radio

(HEOS Music) CH/PAGE ▲▼ △▽◀ ▷ ENTER BACK INTERNET RADIO OPTION BACK ▶/||

  • Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
  • The Internet Radio station list on this unit the database service provided by TuneIn Radio service.
  • The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows.
    See "Playing back Internet Radio" (p. 267) for details.

• WMA
- MP3
- MPEG-4 AAC

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

95

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to Internet Radio - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to Internet Radio - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Listening to Internet Radio - 4

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Listening to Internet Radio

1 Press INTERNET RADIO.

- You can also press ⚫ (HEOS Music). Use △▽ to select “Tuneln Internet Radio”, then press ENTER.

2 Select the station you want to play.

Operation buttons Function
▶/II*Playback / Pause
|◀◀▶▶| *Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE ▲▼Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

* Enabled when playing Podcasts.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Select the station you want to play. - 1

- The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.

NOTE

- The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable without notice.

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

  • "Adding to HEOS Favorites" (p. 115)
  • "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (12p. 117)
  • "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (p. 118)
  • "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (p. 119)
  • "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (p. 121)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

96

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS

(HEOS Music) CH/PAGE ▲▼ △▽◀ ▷ ENTER BACK OPTION BACK 1 2 3 4 ▶/||

  • This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) from DLNA compatible servers including PCs and NAS devices on your network.
  • Supported file formats: For details, see "Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS" (p. 266).

• WMA
• MP3
• WAV
- MPEG-4 AAC
- FLAC
- Apple Lossless
• DSD

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

97

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS - 4

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS

Use this procedure to play music files or playlists stored on DLNA files servers on your local network.

1 Press (HEOS Music).
2 Use to select “Music Servers”, then press ENTER.

MUSIC Tuneln Internet Radio HEOS Favorites Music Servers USB Music

3 Select the name of your networked PC or NAS (Network Attached Storage) server.

4 Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select something to play.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select something to play. - 1

- When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now:Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Now & Replace Queue:Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Next:Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.

Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.

Music Servers- Live Play out Play venue Play venue & Texture Queue Play Menu Ads on Event of Queue Cancel Live 05 Various Artists

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

98

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select something to play. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select something to play. - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select something to play. - 5

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

5 Use △▽ to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now & Replace Queue", then press ENTER.

Playback starts.

NOW PLAYING Live Live Of - Various Artists -2:12:45

Operation buttonsFunction
▶/■Playback / Pause
|◀◀▶▶|Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE ▲▼Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use △▽ to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now &amp; Replace Queue", then press ENTER. - 2

  • The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.
  • When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
  • If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files can be displayed.

NOTE

  • When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In this case, connect using a wired LAN.
  • The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

99

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

  • "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (p. 117)
  • "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (☐ p. 118)
  • "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (p. 119)
  • "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (p. 121)
  • "Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)" (p. 122)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

100

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Operations accessible through the option menu - 2

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Getting the HEOS App

You can use many online music streaming services from the HEOS App. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from.

Download the HEOS App for iOS or Android by searching App Store, Google Play store or Amazon Appstore for "HEOS".

MARANTZ NR1711 - Getting the HEOS App - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Getting the HEOS App - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Getting the HEOS App - 3

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

101

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

#

HEOS Account

HEOS Accounts can be registered in "HEOS Account" (p. 215) in the menu of this unit or by tapping "Music" tab - "Settings" icon in the HEOS App.

■ What is a HEOS Account?

A HEOS Account is master account or "keychain" for managing all of your HEOS music services with one single username and password.

■ Why do I need a HEOS Account?

With the HEOS Account you just have to enter your music services login names and passwords one time. This allows you to easily and quickly use multiple controller apps on different devices.

You just log into your HEOS Account on any device and you will have access to all of your associated music services, play history and custom playlists, even if you are at a friend's house listening to music on their HEOS system.

■ Signing up for a HEOS Account

You will be instructed to signup for a HEOS Account the first time you try to access any music service from the main "Music" menu of the HEOS App.

■ Changing your HEOS Account

1 Tap the "Music" tab.
2 Select the Settings icon ⚙️ in the upper left corner of the screen.
3 Select "HEOS Account".
4 Change your location, change your password, delete your account or sign out of your account.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

102

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Changing your HEOS Account - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Changing your HEOS Account - 2

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playing from streaming music services

A music service is an online music company that provides access to vast music collections via free and/or paid subscriptions. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from.

NOTE

- The HEOS App and brand is not affiliated with any manufacturer of any mobile device. Availability of music services may vary by region. Not all services may be available at time of purchase. Some services may be added or discontinued from time to time based on decisions of the music service providers or others.

■ Selecting a room/device

1 Tap the "Rooms" tab, and select "Marantz NR1711" if there are multiple products with HEOS Built-in.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Selecting a room/device - 1

- Tap the Pencil icon 📋 at the top right to switch edit mode. You can change the displayed name.

Rooms Drag one room into another to group them Dining L + Dining R Song Name 1 Kitchen Song Name 2 Marantz NR1711 Song Name 3

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

103

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Selecting a room/device - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Selecting a room/device - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Selecting a room/device - 5

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Selecting the music track or station from music sources

1 Tap the "Music" tab and select a music source.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tap the "Music" tab and select a music source. - 1

- All music services displayed may not be available in your location.

Music TUNE IN deezer napster SiriusXM SOUNDCLoud This Phone Music Servers USB Music Playlists History

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

104

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tap the "Music" tab and select a music source. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tap the "Music" tab and select a music source. - 4

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

2

Browse the music to play.

After selecting a music track or radio station the app will automatically change to the "Now Playing" screen.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music to play. - 1

- When you select a music track to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now:Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Now & Replace Queue:Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Next:Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.

Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Browse the music to play. - 2

- When you select a radio station the following items are displayed.

Play Now: Plays the selected item immediately.

Add to HEOS Favorites: Adds to HEOS Favorites.

Album BEST OF JAZZ Artist Album 10 Tracks,60 Mins.,2014 Track 01 Rooms Play Now Play Now & Replace Queue Play Next Add to End of Queue Cancel

Now Playing BEST OF JAZZ 0:30 Track 01 Artist Album 2:31 (1) Music Now Playing

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

105

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 3

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Listening to the same music in multiple rooms

This system is a true multi-room audio system. You can create one or more HEOS groups to automatically synchronize audio playback between multiple products with HEOS Built-in so that the music playing different rooms is perfectly in sync and always sounds amazing! You can easily add up to 32 products to your system in total. You can group up to 16 individual products to have them play the same song fully synchronized.

■ Grouping rooms

1 Press and hold your finger on room that is not playing music.
2 Drag it into the room that is playing music (indicated by the red outline) and lift your finger.
3 The two rooms will be grouped together into a single device group and both rooms will be playing the same music in perfect sync.

Rooms Drag one room into another to group them Dining Song Name 1 Living Kitchen Song Name Bedroom Song Name 3 Rooms Drag one room into another to group them Dining Song Name 1 Living+Kitchen Song Name 2 Living Kitchen Drag a room out of the group to group it Bedroom Song Name 8

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

106

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Grouping rooms - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Grouping rooms - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Grouping rooms - 4

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Ungrouping rooms

1 Press and hold your finger on room that you want to remove from the group.
2 Drag it out of the group and lift your finger.

NOTE

- You can not remove the first room that started playing the music before grouping.

Rooms Drag one room into another to group them Dining ||Song Name 1 Living » Song Name 2 Living Kitchen Bedroom Song Name 3 1→ 2→ Rooms Drag one room into another to group them Dining ||Song Name 1 Living » Song Name 2 Kitchen ||Song Name 4 Bedroom » Song Name 3

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

107

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Grouping all rooms (party mode)

You can easily group 16 rooms together into Party Mode by using a "pinch" gesture.

1 Place two fingers on the screen over the list of rooms.
2 Quickly pinch your two fingers together and release.
3 All of your rooms will be joined together and begin playing the same music in perfect sync.

Rooms Drag one room into another to group them Dining Bong Name 1 Living Bong Name 2 Kitchen Bong Name 3 Bedroom Bong Name 4 Rooms Drag one room into another to group them Dining+Living+... Bong Name 1 Dining Living Kitchen Bedroom Drag a room out of this group to group it

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

108

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Grouping all rooms (party mode) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Grouping all rooms (party mode) - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Grouping all rooms (party mode) - 4

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Ungrouping all rooms

You can easily ungroup all of your rooms and exit Party Mode by using a "spread" gesture.

1 Place two fingers close together on the screen over list of rooms.
2 Quickly spread your two fingers apart from each other and release.
3 All of your rooms will be ungrouped.

Rooms Drag one room into another to group them Dining Song Name 1 Dining Living Kitchen Bedroom Drag a room out of this group Dining P? 1 2 3 Rooms Drag one room into another to group them Dining Song Name 1 Living Song Name 2 Kitchen Song Name 3 Bedroom Song Name 4

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

109

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Ungrouping all rooms - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Ungrouping all rooms - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Ungrouping all rooms - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

AirPlay function

Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be played on this unit via the network.

MARANTZ NR1711 - AirPlay function - 1

  • Source input will be switched to "HEOS Music" when AirPlay playback is started.
  • You can stop AirPlay playback by choosing other input source.
    • To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit.
  • For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes.
  • The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.

This unit supports AirPlay 2.

Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous playback.

MARANTZ NR1711 - This unit supports AirPlay 2. - 1

• This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.

MARANTZ NR1711 - This unit supports AirPlay 2. - 2

flowchart
graph LR
    PC["PC"] --> Router["Router"]
    Router --> ThisUnit["This unit"]
    ThisUnit --> Smartphone["Smartphone"]
    style PC fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Router fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style ThisUnit fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style Smartphone fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

110

MARANTZ NR1711 - This unit supports AirPlay 2. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - This unit supports AirPlay 2. - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - This unit supports AirPlay 2. - 5

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad

If you update your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can stream music stored in your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" directly to this unit.

1 Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the same network as this unit.
- For details, see your device's manual.
2 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3 Tap the AirPlay icon and select this unit.

[Example] iOS 12
MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad - 1

[Example] iOS 10
MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad - 2

Playing iTunes music with this unit

1 Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that is connected to the same network as this unit.
2 Turn this unit ON.

Set "Network Control" to "Always On" for this unit. (p. 213)

NOTE

  • When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more standby power.
    3 Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon to select this unit.

[Example] iTunes
MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

4 Choose a song and click play in iTunes.

The music will stream to this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

111

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 4

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

NOTE

- In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level. You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.

Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple synced devices (AirPlay 2)

Songs from an iPhone, iPod touch or iPad operating iOS 11.4 or later can be synced with multiple AirPlay 2 supported devices for simultaneous playback.

1 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad.

AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. - 1

2 Tap the AirPlay icon.

Displays a list of devices/speakers that can be played back on the same network.

- A circle is displayed to the right of AirPlay 2 compatible devices.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tap the AirPlay icon. - 1

3 Tap the devices/speakers you want to use.

- Multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices can be selected. - Volume can be adjusted for each device individually or for all synced devices simultaneously.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tap the devices/speakers you want to use. - 1

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

112

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Spotify Connect function

Spotify is all the music you'll ever need. Millions of songs available instantly. Just search for the music you love, or let Spotify play you something great. Spotify works on your phone, tablet, computer and home speakers. So you'll always have the perfect soundtrack for whatever you're doing. Now you can enjoy Spotify with your free account as well as Premium account.

Use your phone, tablet or computer as a remote control for Spotify. Go to www.spotify.com/connect to learn how.

The Spotify software is subject to third party licenses found here: www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses

MARANTZ NR1711 - Spotify Connect function - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Spotify server"] --> B["Spotify"]
    B --> C["Control"]
    C --> D["Spotify App"]
    E["This unit"] --> F["Audio streaming/control"]
    F --> C
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Playing Spotify music with this unit

Download the "Spotify App" onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.

1 Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device in the same network as this unit.
2 Launch the Spotify App.
3 Play back the Spotify track.
4 Tap the Spotify icon Ⓜ to select the unit. The music will stream to this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

113

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing Spotify music with this unit - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing Spotify music with this unit - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing Spotify music with this unit - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing Spotify music with this unit - 4

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Contents Connections"] --> B["Settings Tips Appendix"]
    B --> C["End"]

Convenience functions

MAIN (HEOS Music) △▽◀ ▶ ENTER OPTION

This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for each input source.

These functions can only be set in the MAIN ZONE.

Front panel D y Rear panel Re Index 114

Contents Connections

Setti

Adding to HEOS Favorites

1 While content is playing, press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select "Add to HEOS Favorites", then press ENTER.

Playing back HEOS Favorites

1 Press (HEOS Music).
2 Use △▽ to select "HEOS Favorites", then press ENTER.

MUSIC Tuneln Internet Radio HEOS Favorites Music Servers USB Music

3 Browse the content and select something to play.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

115

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing back HEOS Favorites - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing back HEOS Favorites - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing back HEOS Favorites - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Deleting a HEOS Favorites

1 While the HEOS Favorites content list is displayed, use to select the item you want to remove from HEOS Favorites, then press OPTION.
2 Use to select “Remove from HEOS Favorites”, then press ENTER.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

116

MARANTZ NR1711 - Deleting a HEOS Favorites - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Deleting a HEOS Favorites - 2

Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)

The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You can set this for each input source.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “Channel Level Adjust”, then press ENTER.

The "Channel Level Adjust" screen is displayed.

3 Use to select the channel that you wish to adjust.

4 Use ◀▷ to adjust the volume.

-12.0 dB - +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

5 Use △▽◀▷ to select "Exit", then press ENTER.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use △▽◀▷ to select "Exit", then press ENTER. - 1

  • Select "Reset" and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of the various channels to "0.0 dB" (Default).
  • Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected.
  • "Channel Level Adjust" settings are stored for each input source.
  • You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set this when in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV". (P. 170)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

117

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use △▽◀▷ to select "Exit", then press ENTER. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use △▽◀▷ to select "Exit", then press ENTER. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use △▽◀▷ to select "Exit", then press ENTER. - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Adjusting the tone (Tone)

Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “Tone”, then press ENTER.

The "Tone" screen is displayed.

3 Use ◀▷ to set the tone control function to on/off.

On: Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).

Off

(Default):

Playback without tone adjustment.

4 Select "On" in step 3 and press to select the sound range to be adjusted.

Bass: Adjust bass.

Treble: Adjust treble.

5 Use ◀▶ to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.

-6 dB - +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▶ to adjust the tone, then press ENTER. - 1

  • "Tone" settings are stored for each input source.
  • This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct".
  • This item cannot be set when "Dynamic EQ" is set to "On". (p. 165)
  • You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV". (17 p. 170)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

118

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▶ to adjust the tone, then press ENTER. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▶ to adjust the tone, then press ENTER. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▶ to adjust the tone, then press ENTER. - 4

Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)

This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio playback. You can set this for each input source.

□ Supported input sources:

CD\* / Tuner / HEOS Music / Phono

* This cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video connectors are assigned.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “Video Select”, then press ENTER.

The "Video Select" screen is displayed.

3 Use ◀▷ to select the Video Select mode.

Off

(Default):

Disable Video Select mode.

On: Enable Video Select mode.

4 If you selected "On" in step 3, press and select "Source".

5 Use ◀▷ to select the input source for video you want to play back, then press ENTER.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▷ to select the Video Select mode. - 1

- "Video Select" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

119

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▷ to select the Video Select mode. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▷ to select the Video Select mode. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▷ to select the Video Select mode. - 4

Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)

☐ Supported input sources : CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX / Media Player / CD* / TV Audio*

* You can set the picture mode when an HDMI connector is assigned and "i/p Scaler" is set to "On". (17) p. 176)

1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Picture Mode”, then press ENTER. The “Picture Mode” screen is displayed.

3 Use ◀▷ to select the picture mode.

Off(Default):No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
Standard:The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.
Movie:A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.
Vivid:A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
Streaming:A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
ISF Day:A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.
ISF Night:A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.
Custom:Adjusts the picture quality manually.

4 Press ENTER.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode) - 1

- "Picture Mode" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

120

MARANTZ NR1711 - Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode) - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode) - 4

Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)

You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE simultaneously in ZONE2 (another room).

It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same background music in the entire house.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.

The "All Zone Stereo" screen is displayed.

3 Select "Start", then press ENTER.

The input source for ZONE2 is switched to the same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the All Zone Stereo mode.

■ Stopping the All Zone Stereo mode

1 During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use △▽ to select "All Zone Stereo", then press ENTER.

3 Select "Stop", then press ENTER.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Select "Stop", then press ENTER. - 1

  • The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN ZONE is turned off.
  • In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the "Multi Ch Stereo" and "Stereo" sound modes can be selected.
  • When "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", the All Zone Stereo mode is not available. (15 p. 170)
  • Save the All Zone Stereo mode playback status to the Smart Select function to enable simple playback in All Zone Stereo mode with a single touch.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

121

MARANTZ NR1711 - Select "Stop", then press ENTER. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Select "Stop", then press ENTER. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Select "Stop", then press ENTER. - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)

Two speaker settings can be saved to suit the environments where you use your speakers.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use △▽ to select "Speaker Preset", then press ENTER.

The "Speaker Preset" screen is displayed.

3 Use ◀▷ to set the preset.

Preset 1

(Default):

Use Preset 1.

Preset 2: Use Preset 2.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▷ to set the preset. - 1

- This function can be used in the following cases.

  • Adjust the speaker settings manually after setting "Speaker Preset" to "Preset 2".
  • Save the result to "Preset 2" after performing Audyssey® Setup for a second time.
  • Adjust the speaker settings manually after setting "Speaker Preset" to "Preset 2".
  • Save the result to "Preset 2" after performing Audyssey® Setup for a second time.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

122

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▷ to set the preset. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Use ◀▷ to set the preset. - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Selecting a sound mode

MARANTZ NR1711 - Selecting a sound mode - 1

This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo playback modes.

Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from internet-based subscription services.

This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Selecting a sound mode - 2

- For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

123

MARANTZ NR1711 - Selecting a sound mode - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Selecting a sound mode - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Selecting a sound mode - 5

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Selecting a sound mode

1 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.

MOVIE :Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies and TV programs.
MUSIC :Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.
GAME :Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode. - 1

  • The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as the one selected at the previous playback.
  • If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode, the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.
  • You can also select the sound mode by pressing SOUND MODE on the main unit.

■ Switching the sound mode

  • Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME, the sound mode changes.
  • While the list is displayed, you can also use to select a sound mode.
  • Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite mode.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Switching the sound mode - 1

- Please set the surround mode to Dolby Atmos/Surround when playing back Dolby Atmos encoded content. Dolby Atmos/Surround delivers the optimum playback experience from Blu-ray and streaming sources encoded with Dolby Atmos as well as channel based content. The default setting of this receiver is Dolby Atmos/Surround.

[Example] When MOVIE is pressed
MOVIE SOUND Stereo Dolby Audio - Dolby Surround DTS Neural.X Multi Ch Stereo Virtual

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

124

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Switching the sound mode - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Switching the sound mode - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Switching the sound mode - 5

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Direct playback

Sound recorded in source is played as is.

1 Press PURE to select "Direct".

Direct playback begins.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press PURE to select "Direct". - 1

- This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

Pure Direct playback

This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback mode.

This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.

1 Press PURE to select "Pure Direct".

The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins. The PURE DIRECT indicator lights.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press PURE to select "Pure Direct". - 1

- In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.

  • Tone (17 p. 118)
    • M-DAX (p. 161)
  • MultEQ ^ (p. 164)
    • Dynamic EQ (p. 165)
    • Dynamic Volume (166 p. 166)
    • Graphic EQ (p. 166)

- This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

NOTE

• Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct mode.
- When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5 seconds.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

125

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Auto surround playback

This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically selects the corresponding mode for playback.

Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.

1 Press PURE to select "Auto".

Auto surround playback begins.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press PURE to select "Auto". - 1

- This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

126

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press PURE to select "Auto". - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press PURE to select "Auto". - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Description of sound mode types

Dolby sound mode

Sound mode type Description
Dolby AtmosPlease select this mode to play content encoded with Dolby Atmos. If you have selected a different sound mode previously, please select again this mode for Dolby Atmos content play back. It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and/or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field. An immersive audio experience can be enjoyed from traditional speaker layouts that do not employ overhead or Dolby Atmos Enabled Speakers by selecting the Speaker Virtualizer feature.
Dolby TrueHD Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby TrueHD at 192kHz/96kHz.
Dolby Digital Plus Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital Plus.
Dolby Digital Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital.
Dolby SurroundThis mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback. Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

127

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 3

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

DTS sound mode

Sound mode type Description
DTS Surround This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
DTS ES Dscrt6.1*1This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel.Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1*1This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software recording time is decoded by this unit's matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right, surround back).
DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
DTS:X This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with DTS:X.It decodes DTS:X content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
DTS Neural:XThis mode uses DTS Neural:X Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.Use height speakers such as front height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
DTS Virtual:X*2*3This mode uses DTS Virtual:X with virtual height and virtual surround processing to realize a three-dimensional sound field when the height speakers are not used.

*1 This can be selected when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is not set to "None". (p. 200)
*2 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos.
*3 This can be selected when Height, Ceiling and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers are not being used.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

128

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 6

Contents Connections

Settings Tips Appendix

PCM multi-channel sound mode

Sound mode type Description
Multi Ch In This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM sources.

Original sound mode

Sound mode type Description
Multi Ch Stereo This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
Virtual This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R) speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.

Auto sound mode

Sound mode type Description
AutoIn this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Atmos, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS:X, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches automatically to the corresponding mode.If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

129

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 7

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 8

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 9

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Stereo sound mode

Sound mode type Description
Stereo This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing.Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected.When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no additional surround sound processing.

Direct sound mode

Sound mode type Description
Direct This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source.
Pure Direct This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the “Direct” mode.The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality.• Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.)• The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

130

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 10

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 11

MARANTZ NR1711 - Description of sound mode types - 12

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal

  • The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons.
  • Adjust the sound field effect with the menu "Surround Parameter" to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (p. 158)

*1 2-channel also includes analog input.
*2 This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1 or 7.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used or when the speaker configuration is front speakers only.
*3 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used.
*4 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos.
*5 This cannot be selected when headphones are used.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

131

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal - 3

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Input signalSound modeMOVIE buttonMUSIC buttonGAME button
Multi-channel *6Stereo
Dolby DigitalDolby Digital *5 ○
Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround *5 ○
Dolby Digital + Neural:X *5 ○
Dolby Digital PlusDolby Digital Plus *5 ○
Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surround *5*8
Dolby Digital Plus + Neural:X *5 ○
Dolby Atmos *5*7 ○
Dolby TrueHDDolby TrueHD *5 ○
Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surround *5*8 ○
Dolby TrueHD + Neural:X *5 ○
Dolby Atmos *5*7 ○
Dolby AtmosDolby Atmos *5 ○
DTSDTS Surround *5 ○○○
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1 *5 ○
DTS ES Mtrx 6.1 *5
DTS 96/24 *5
DTS + Dolby Surround *5
DTS + Neural:X *5
DTS + Virtual:X *3

*3 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used.
*5 This cannot be selected when headphones are used.
*6 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels.
*7 This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.
*8 This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

132

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal - 4

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Input signalSound modeMOVIE buttonMUSIC buttonGAME button
DTS-HD / DTS ExpressDTS-HD HI RES *5 ○○○
DTS-HD MSTR *5 ○○○
DTS Express *5 ○○○
DTS-HD + Dolby Surround *5 ○
DTS-HD + Neural:X *5 ○○○
DTS-HD + Virtual:X *3 ○○○
DTS:XDTS:X *5 ○○○
DTS:X MSTR *5 ○○○
DTS:X + Virtual:X *3 ○○○
PCM multi-channelMulti Ch In *5 ○
Multi Ch In 7.1 *5 ○
Multi In + Dolby Surround *5 ○
Multi In + Neural:X *5
Multi In + Virtual:X *3
Multi-channel *6Multi Ch Stereo *5
Virtual

*3 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used.
*5 This cannot be selected when headphones are used.
*6 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal - 5

- Only "Stereo" and "Virtual" can be selected when headphones are used.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

133

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal - 6

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

■ Views on the display

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Views on the display - 1

① Shows a decoder to be used.
- In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, "DD+" is displayed.
② Shows a decoder that creates sound output.
- "DSUR" indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

134

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Views on the display - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Views on the display - 3

HDMI Control function

A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with another device via the HDMI cable connection.

Setting procedure

1 Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit.
Set "HDMI Control" to "On". (p. 172)
2 Turn the power on for all the devices connected by HDMI cable.
3 Set the HDMI Control function for all devices connected by HDMI cable.

- Please consult the operating instructions for the connected devices to check the settings.

- Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.

4 Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected to this unit.

5 Switch the input source of this unit to check that video from the player connected by HDMI is played back correctly.
6 When you turn the TV's power to standby, check that the power of this unit also goes to standby.

NOTE

- Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check the owner's manual of each device for details beforehand.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

135

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Smart Menu function

This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control.

1 Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit and the TV. (☐ p. 172)
2 Set "Smart Menu" to "On" on this unit. (p. 174)
3 Select "AV Receiver" in a TV menu such as "Input" * or "Operate Connected HDMI Device" *.

The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV.

- This unit can be operated with the TV remote control while the Smart Menu is displayed.

* The selection method differs depending on your TV.

Smart Menu Now Playing Blu-ray Setup MenuSound Smart Select 35SmartSelect2Smart S Help

■ Now Playing

Enjoy content from the input source currently selected on this unit.

Source

Switch the input of this unit.

If you select "HEOS Music" or "Tuner", you can continue to operate this unit using the TV remote control.

Sound Mode

Change the sound mode of this unit.

You can select from the following three sound modes.

Surround:Surround sound playback according to the input signal.
Stereo: Stereo playback.
Multi Ch Stereo: Multi-channel stereo playback.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

136

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound Mode - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound Mode - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound Mode - 3

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Setup Menu

Displays a setup menu for configuring the settings of this unit.

Smart Select

Calls up the "Smart Select" items registered to this unit.

NOTE

  • If the "HDMI Control" or "Smart Menu" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.
  • The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the specifications of your TV. In this case, set "Smart Menu" to "Off". (174)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

137

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Sleep timer function

MAIN ZONE2 SLEEP ZONE SELECT MAIN SLEEP ZONE2 SLEEP

You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

138

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sleep timer function - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sleep timer function - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sleep timer function - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Using the sleep timer

1 Press MAIN or ZONE2 to select the operating zone with the remote control.

The button for the selected zone is lit.

2 Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.

  • The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display and the sleep timer starts.
  • You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in steps of 10 minutes.

■ Checking the remaining time

Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation.

The remaining time appears on the display.

■ To cancel the sleep timer

Press SLEEP to select "Off".

The SLEEP indicator on the display turns off.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ To cancel the sleep timer - 1

- The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.

NOTE

- The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this unit. To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the connected devices themselves.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

139

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Smart select function

MAIN ZONE2 ZONE SELECT 1 2 3 4 SMART SELECT 1 - 4

Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be registered to the SMART SELECT 1 - 4 buttons.

You can simply press one of the registered SMART SELECT buttons in subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch. By saving frequently used settings at the SMART SELECT 1 - 4 buttons, you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment. The Smart Select function can be memorized for each zone.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

140

MARANTZ NR1711 - Smart select function - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Smart select function - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Smart select function - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Calling up the settings

1 Press MAIN or ZONE2 to select the operating zone with the remote control.

The button for the selected zone is lit.

2 Press SMART SELECT.

The Smart Select settings registered to the button you pressed are called up.

- The default settings for the input source are as shown below.

【MAIN ZONE】

Button Input source
SMART SELECT 1 CBL/SAT
SMART SELECT 2 Blu-ray
SMART SELECT 3 Media Player
SMART SELECT 4 HEOS Music

【ZONE2】

Button Input source
SMART SELECT 1 CBL/SAT
SMART SELECT 2 -
SMART SELECT 3 -
SMART SELECT 4 HEOS Music

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press SMART SELECT. - 1

  • Volume is not registered to Smart Select in the factory default settings. See "Changing the settings" to register volume to Smart Select. (125) p. 142

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

141

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press SMART SELECT. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Press SMART SELECT. - 3

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Changing the settings

1 Set the items below to the settings you want to register.

The following settings from ① to ⑩ can be memorized for MAIN ZONE, and settings ① and ② can be memorized for ZONE2.

① Input source (p. 71)
② Volume (p. 72)
③ Sound mode (p. 123)
④ Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ ^® , Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® , Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^® ) (p. 164)
⑤ "M-DAX" (p. 161)
⑥ "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (17 p. 117)
⑦ "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (199 p. 119)
⑧ "Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)" (☑ p. 120)
⑨ "All Zone Stereo" (p. 121)
⑩ "Speaker Preset" (p. 122)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set the items below to the settings you want to register. - 1

  • Press and hold SMART SELECT while a radio station is being received is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio station is memorized.
  • Tuner / Internet Radio Station

2 Press MAIN or ZONE2 to select the operating zone with the remote control.

The button for the selected zone is lit.

3 Press and hold the desired SMART SELECT until "Smart\* Memory" or "Z2 Smart\* Memory" appear on the display.

The current settings will be memorized.

* is displayed the number for the SMART SELECT button you pressed.

■ Changing the Smart Select Name

The MAIN ZONE Smart Select name displayed on the TV screen or display of this unit can be changed to a different name.

For the name change method, see "Smart Select Names" (p. 222).

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

142

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Changing the Smart Select Name - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Changing the Smart Select Name - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Changing the Smart Select Name - 3

Panel lock function

To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of the buttons on the front panel.

M-DAX DIMMER STATUS ZONE2 SOURCE INTERNET RADIO

Disabling all key button operations

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO to select "FP/VOL LOCK On".
3 Press STATUS to enter the setting. All button operations except ⏻ are disabled.

Disabling all button operations except VOLUME

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO to select "FP LOCK On".
3 Press STATUS to enter the setting. All button operations except ⏻ and VOLUME are disabled.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

143

MARANTZ NR1711 - Disabling all button operations except VOLUME - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Disabling all button operations except VOLUME - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Disabling all button operations except VOLUME - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Canceling the Panel lock function

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Press ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO to select "FP LOCK *Off".

(* The currently set mode.)

3 Press STATUS to enter the setting.

The Panel lock function is canceled.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Canceling the Panel lock function - 1

- Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote control unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

144

MARANTZ NR1711 - Canceling the Panel lock function - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Canceling the Panel lock function - 3

Remote lock function

When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote control unit.

By default, this function is disabled.

M-DAX DIMMER STATUS ZONE2 SOURCE INTERNET RADIO

Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO to select "RC LOCK On".
3 Press STATUS to enter the setting. The infrared light receiving function is disabled.

Enabling the remote sensor function

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold M-DAX and DIMMER with the unit in standby mode.
2 Press ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO to select "RC LOCK *Off".
(* The currently set mode.)
3 Press STATUS to enter the setting. Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

145

MARANTZ NR1711 - Enabling the remote sensor function - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Enabling the remote sensor function - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Enabling the remote sensor function - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Web control function

You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Web control function - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    PC["PC"] --> Router["Router"]
    Router --> ThisUnit["This unit"]
    Tablet["Tablet"] --> Router
    Router --> ThisUnit

MARANTZ NR1711 - Web control function - 2

  • This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in order to use the web control function. (rF p. 65)
  • Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the security-related software.

Controlling the unit from a web control

1 Switch the "Network Control" setting to "Always On". (p. 213)
2 Check the IP address of this unit with "Information". (p. 208)

Network/Information Friendly Name Marantz NR1711 DHCP On Connection Wired (Ethernet) IP Address 122.05.110.05 MAC Address (Ethernet) 17111-368368 MAC Address (Wi-Fi) $********-000000 Checking the IP address. Displays the current network settings of the AVR

3 Start up the web browser.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

146

MARANTZ NR1711 - Controlling the unit from a web control - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Controlling the unit from a web control - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Controlling the unit from a web control - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

4 Enter the IP address of this unit in browser's address box.

For example, if the IP address of this unit is "192.168.100.19", enter "http://192.168.100.19".

MARANTZ NR1711 - Enter the IP address of this unit in browser's address box. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Enter the IP address of this unit in browser's address box. - 2

5 When the top menu is displayed on the web browser, click on the menu item you want to operate.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

147

MARANTZ NR1711 - When the top menu is displayed on the web browser, click on the menu item you want to operate. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - When the top menu is displayed on the web browser, click on the menu item you want to operate. - 2

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playback in ZONE2 (Another room)

You can operate this unit to enjoy audio in a room (ZONE2) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE).

You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2.

If the input for ZONE2 is set to "Source", both digital and analog connected devices can be listened to from ZONE2.

If the input for ZONE2 is set to a specific source (like CBL/SAT), only connected analog devices can be listened to from ZONE2.

Connecting ZONE2

You can use the following two methods to play back audio in ZONE2.

  • "Connecting using a speaker output terminal" (☐ p. 148)
  • "Connecting using an external amplifier" (p. 149)

■ Connection 1: Connecting using a speaker output terminal

When "Assign Mode" is set to "ZONE2" in the menu, ZONE2 audio is output from the SURROUND BACK speaker terminal. (p. 197)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 1: Connecting using a speaker output terminal - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["MAIN ZONE"] --> B["This unit"]
    B --> C["(R)"]
    B --> D["(L)"]
    C --> E["Zoomed Range"]
    D --> E
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

148

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 1: Connecting using a speaker output terminal - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 1: Connecting using a speaker output terminal - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 1: Connecting using a speaker output terminal - 4

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

■ Connection 2 : Connection using an external amplifier (ZONE2)

The audio signals of this unit's ZONE2 audio output connectors are output to the ZONE2 amplifiers and played on these amplifiers.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 2 : Connection using an external amplifier (ZONE2) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["MAIN ZONE"] --> B["This unit"]
    B --> C["Power amplifier"]
    C --> D["AUX IN"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

149

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 2 : Connection using an external amplifier (ZONE2) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 2 : Connection using an external amplifier (ZONE2) - 3

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Playback in ZONE2
ZONE2 POWER ⏻ Input source select buttons MUTE ⏻ VOLUME ▲▼

1 Press ZONE2 to set the operating zone to ZONE2 with the remote control.

The ZONE2 button lights.

2 Press POWER ⏻ to turn on the ZONE2 power.

The Z2 indicator on the display lights.

- Power in ZONE2 can be turned on or off by pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF on the main unit.

3 Press the input source select button to select the input source to be played.

The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2.

- You can also select ZONE2 as the input source by pressing ZONE2 SOURCE and then turning the INPUT SELECTOR.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 2 : Connection using an external amplifier (ZONE2) - 5

- Setting the input source of ZONE2 as the "Source" allows you to play the same content in MAIN ZONE and in ZONE2, regardless of the type of input signal.

  • Turn the INPUT SELECTOR after pressing the ZONE2 SOURCE on the main unit, set the input source of ZONE2 as the "Source".
  • If the MAIN ZONE input source is changed while ZONE2 is selected as the "Source", then ZONE2's input source will be changed to mirror the MAIN ZONE's input source.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

150

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 2 : Connection using an external amplifier (ZONE2) - 6

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 2 : Connection using an external amplifier (ZONE2) - 7

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Connection 2 : Connection using an external amplifier (ZONE2) - 8

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Adjusting the volume (ZONE2)

Use VOLUME ▲▼ to adjust the volume.

- At time of purchase, "Volume Limit" is set to "70 (-10 dB)". (Kp. 221)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Adjusting the volume (ZONE2) - 1

- Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 SOURCE on the main unit to adjust the volume.

■ Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2)

Press MUTE 📄X.
The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (p. 222)
- To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE 📄X again.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

151

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2) - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2) - 2

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV.

The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.

Setting itemsDetailed items Description Page
MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 1AudioCenter Level AdjustAdjusts the center channel volume to clarify the dialog for all sources.157
Subwoofer Level AdjustAdjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources. 157
Surround Parameter Adjustssurround sound parameters. 158
M-DAX Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.161
Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. 162
Volume Sets the MAIN ZONE(room where the unit is located) volume setting. 163
AudysseyMakes Audyssey MultEQ®, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®and Audyssey Dynamic Volume®settings.164
Graphic EQ Uses the graphicequalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker. 166
MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 2VideoPicture AdjustAdjusts picture quality.168
HDMI SetupMakes settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings.170
Output SettingsMakes settings for video output.175
On Screen DisplayConfigures the on-screen display settings.178
Screen SaverSelect the screen saver setting.179
4K/8K Signal FormatSets signal format options for your 4K or 8K video equipment.180
HDCP SetupSets the HDCP version for each HDMI input source.181
TV FormatSets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.182

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

152

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 3

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items Detailed items Description Page
MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 4InputsInput Assign Changes input connector assignment and the audio input mode. 183
Source Rename Changes the display name for input source. 186
Hide Sources Removes from the display input sources that are not used. 186
Source Level Adjusts the play back level of the audio input. 186
MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 5SpeakersAudyssey® SetupThe acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically.187
Manual SetupSets up the speakers manually or changes Audyssey® Setup settings.197
MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 6NetworkInformation Displays network information. 208
Connection Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. 208
Settings Used for manually setting the IP address. 211
Network ControlEnables network communication in standby power mode.213
Friendly NameThe “Friendly Name” is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.213
DiagnosticsUsed to check the network connection.214
AirPlaySettings for Apple AirPlay.214

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

153

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 7

ContentsConnectionsPlaybackSettingsTipsAppendix
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 8HEOS Account[When the user is signed out the HEOS Account]
I have a HEOS Account Selects to sign in. 215
Create Account Creates newHEOS Account. 215
Forgot PasswordIf you forgot your password, we'll send you an email with instructions about how to reset it.215
[When the user is signed in the HEOS Account]
Signed in As Displays your HEOS Account. 215
Change Location Selects your location. 215
Change Password Changes your HEOS Account Password. 215
Delete Account Deletes your HEOS Account. 215
Sign Out Sign out of your HEOS Account. 215

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

154

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 9

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items Detailed items Description Page
MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 10GeneralLanguage Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. 216
ECO Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions. 216
Bluetooth Transmitter Sets Bluetooth transmitter settings. 220
ZONE2 Setup Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2. 221
Zone Rename Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. 222
Smart Select Names Changes the Smart Select Name display title to one you prefer. 222
Trigger OutSelect the conditions for activating trigger out function.223
Front DisplayMakes settings related to the display on this unit.223
FirmwareChecks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display.224
InformationShows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.227
Usage DataSelects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Marantz.229
Save & LoadSave and restore device settings by using a USB memory device.229
Setup LockProtects settings from inadvertent changes.230
ResetVarious settings are reset to the factory default values.230
MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 11Setup AssistantBegin Setup...Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the guidance indicated on the TV screen.Page 9 of the separate manual“Quick Start Guide”
Language SelectSets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.
Speaker Setup
Speaker Calibration
Network Setup
TV Audio Connection
Input Setup
Mobile Apps

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

155

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu map - 12

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

MAIN Δ▽◀ ▶ ENTER BACK SETUP

1 Press MAIN on the remote control unit to set the operating zone to the MAIN ZONE. The MAIN button lights.
2 Press SETUP. The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3 Use to select the menu to be set or operated, then press ENTER.
4 Use ◀▶ to change to desired setting.
5 Press ENTER to enter the setting.

• To return to the previous item, press BACK.

- Exiting the menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The menu display disappears.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

156

MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu operations - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu operations - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Menu operations - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Audio

Make audio-related settings.

Center Level Adjust

Adjusts the center channel volume to clarify the dialog for all sources.

Center

Adjusts the volume output from the center channel.

-12.0 dB - +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Center - 1

- This setting is also reflected in the center channel level in the "Speakers" - "Levels" menu settings. (12 p. 204)

Subwoofer Level Adjust

Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources.

Subwoofer

Adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.

-12.0 dB - +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Subwoofer - 1

- This setting is also reflected in the subwoofer channel level in the "Speakers" - "Levels" menu settings. (i.e. p. 204)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

157

MARANTZ NR1711 - Subwoofer - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Subwoofer - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Subwoofer - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Surround Parameter

You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your preferences.

The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set sound mode.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Surround Parameter - 1

  • Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings during playback.
  • "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.

Cinema EQ

Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce possible harshness and improve clarity.

On:“Cinema EQ” is used.
Off(Default):“Cinema EQ” is not used.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cinema EQ - 1

- This item cannot be set when sound mode is "Direct", "Pure Direct", "Stereo" and "Original sound mode".

■ Loudness Management

This sets whether to output as specified in "Dynamic Compression" or output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio recorded in the disc.

On(Default):Outputs are given based on enabling the settings made in “Dynamic Compression” and Dialogue normalization function.
Off:“Dynamic Compression” settings and Dialogue normalization are disabled, and the signals on the disc are output as is.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Loudness Management - 1

- "Loudness Management" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and Dolby Atmos signal is input.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

158

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Loudness Management - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Loudness Management - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Dynamic Compression

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

Auto:Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to source.
Low / Medium / High: These set the compression level.
Off:Dynamic range compression is always off.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Dynamic Compression - 1

  • "Dynamic Compression" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS signal is input.
  • The default setting is "Off". When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is "Auto".
  • "Auto" cannot be set when inputting a DTS signal.

■ Dialog Control

Adjust the volume of dialog in movies, vocals in music, etc. so these can be heard more easily.

0 - 6 (Default : 0)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Dialog Control - 1

- This can be set when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input.

■ Low Frequency Effects

Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).

-10 dB - 0 dB (Default: 0 dB)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Low Frequency Effects - 1

  • This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal.
  • This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
  • For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the values below.

• Dolby Digital sources: 0 dB
• DTS movie sources: 0 dB
• DTS music sources: -10 dB

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

159

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Low Frequency Effects - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Low Frequency Effects - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Speaker Virtualizer

The Speaker Virtualizer enhances the surround and height speaker channels to create an enveloping virtual surround effect.

On

(Default):

Enables "Speaker Virtualizer".

Off: Disables "Speaker Virtualizer".

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Speaker Virtualizer - 1

  • You can set this when the sound mode is "Dolby Atmos", "Dolby Surround" or sound mode that has "+Dolby Surround" in the sound mode name.
  • Usable when not using height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers, or when not using surround speakers.
  • Audio is not output from the surround back speaker if "Speaker Virtualizer" is set to "On" when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is set to "1 spkr" in the menu.

■ DTS Neural:X

DTS Neural:X Expands the non-object based audio signals and optimizes them for your speaker configuration.

On

(Default):

Use "DTS Neural:X".

Off: Do not use "DTS Neural:X".

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ DTS Neural:X - 1

- You can set this when sound mode is "DTS:X" or "DTS:X MSTR".

Subwoofer

Turn subwoofer output on and off.

On

The subwoofer is used.

(Default):

Off: The subwoofer is not used.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Subwoofer - 1

- You can set this when the sound mode is "Direct" or "Stereo" and in the menu "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "LFE+Main". (1987 p. 206)

Set Defaults

The "Surround Parameter" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

160

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 3

M-DAX

Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The "M-DAX" function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded tonal range.

■ Mode

High:Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs (64 kbps and under).
Medium:Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources (96 kbps and under).
Low:Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs (96 kbps and over).
Off: Do not use “M-DAX”.

MARANTZ NR1711 - M-DAX - 1

• The M-DAX indicator lights.
- This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input.
- This item default setting for "HEOS Music" is "Low". All others are set to "Off".
- This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct".
- "M-DAX" settings are stored for each input source.
- This can also be set by pressing M-DAX on the main unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

161

MARANTZ NR1711 - M-DAX - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - M-DAX - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Audio Delay

Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio Delay - 1

  • Audio Delay for game mode can be set when "Video Mode" is set to "Auto" or "Game". (17 p. 175)
  • "Audio Delay" settings are stored for each input source.

■ Auto Lip Sync

Automatically adjusts the audio processing time to compensate for delays in audio/video timing from TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync.

On

(Default):

Correct automatically.

Off: Do not correct automatically.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Auto Lip Sync - 1

- Automatic correction may not be performed depending on the specifications of your TV even when "Auto Lip Sync" is set to "On".

Adjust

The timing mismatch between the picture and sound needs to be corrected manually.

0 ms - 500 ms (Default : 0 ms)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Adjust - 1

  • You can also finely adjust the delay correction value set by "Auto Lip Sync".
  • Adjust for game mode can be set when "Video Mode" is set to "Auto" or "Game". (17) p. 175

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

162

MARANTZ NR1711 - Adjust - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Adjust - 3

Volume

Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

Scale

Set how volume is displayed.

0 - 98(Default):Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB:Display ---dB (Min), in the range -79.5 dB to 18.0 dB.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Scale - 1

- "Scale" settings are reflected in all the zones.

Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

60 - 80 (-20 dB - 0 dB)

Off (Default)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Limit - 1

- The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (Kp. p. 163)

Power On Level

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Last (Default):Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Mute:Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.

1 - 98 (-79 dB - 18 dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Power On Level - 1

- The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (p. 163)

■ Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

Full(Default):The sound is muted entirely.
-40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
-20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

163

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Mute Level - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Mute Level - 2

Audyssey®

Set Audyssey MultEQ ^® , Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^® . These can be selected after Audyssey ^® Setup has been performed.

For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see "Explanation of terms" (p. 268).

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audyssey® - 1

  • "MultEQ®", "Dynamic EQ", "Reference Level Offset" and "Dynamic Volume" settings are stored for each input source.
  • When the sound mode is in the "Direct" or "Pure Direct" mode, "MultEQ®", "Dynamic EQ" and "Dynamic Volume" settings cannot be configured.
  • When the sound mode is in "DTS Virtual:X" or sound mode that have "+Virtual:X" in the sound mode name, "MultEQ®", "Dynamic EQ" and "Dynamic Volume" settings cannot be configured.
  • This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.

MultEQ®

MultEQ ^® compensates for both time and frequency characteristics of the listening area based on “Audyssey ^® Setup” measurement results. Selection is done from three types of compensation curves. We recommend the “Reference” setting.

Reference (Default):Selects the default calibrated setting with a slight roll off at high frequencies, which is optimized for movies.
L/R Bypass:Selects the reference setting, but bypasses MultEQ® on the front left and right speakers.
Flat:Selects the calibrated setting which is optimized for small rooms where your listening position is closer to the speakers.
Off:Do not use “MultEQ®”.

MARANTZ NR1711 - MultEQ® - 1

- When using headphones, "MultEQ®" is automatically set to "Off".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

164

MARANTZ NR1711 - MultEQ® - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - MultEQ® - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Dynamic EQ

Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics.

Works with MultEQ®.

On

Use "Dynamic EQ".

(Default):

Off: Do not use "Dynamic EQ".

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Dynamic EQ - 1

  • When the menu "Dynamic EQ" setting is "On", it is not possible to do "Tone" adjustment. (19 p. 118)
  • This item cannot be set when "MultEQ®" in the menu is set to "Off".

■ Reference Level Offset

Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard. Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.

0 dB (Film Reference) (Default):Optimized for content such as movies.
5 dB :Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music.
10 dB :Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
15 dB :Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Reference Level Offset - 1

- Setting is enabled when "Dynamic EQ" is "On". (165)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

165

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Reference Level Offset - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Reference Level Offset - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Dynamic Volume

Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user's preferred volume setting.

Works with MultEQ®

Heavy:Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds.
Medium:Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.
Light:Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
Off(Default):Do not use “Dynamic Volume”.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Dynamic Volume - 1

  • If "Dynamic Volume" is set to "Yes" in "Audyssey® Setup", the setting is automatically changed to "Medium". (I p. 187)
  • This item cannot be set when "MultEQ®" in the menu is set to "Off".

Graphic EQ

Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Graphic EQ - 1

  • Speakers for which "Graphic EQ" can be set differ according to the sound mode.
  • This can be set when "MultEQ®" setting is "Off". (17 p. 164)
  • This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct".
  • If you are using headphones, you can set the equalizer for headphones. (1 p. 166)

■ Graphic EQ / Headphone EQ

Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.

On:Use the graphic equalizer.
Off(Default):Do not use the graphic equalizer.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Graphic EQ / Headphone EQ - 1

- "Headphone EQ" is set in the menu when headphones are used.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

166

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Graphic EQ / Headphone EQ - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Graphic EQ / Headphone EQ - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Graphic EQ / Headphone EQ - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Speaker Selection

Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all speakers.

All: Adjust all speaker tones together.

Left/Right(Default):Adjust the left and right speaker tones together.

Each: Adjust the tone for each speaker.

Adjust EQ

Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band.

  1. Select the speaker.
  2. Select the adjustment frequency band.
    63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz / 16 kHz
  3. Adjust the level.
    -20.0 dB - +6.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Adjust EQ - 1

- Front Dolby and Surround Dolby speakers can only be set when 63 Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.

■ Curve Copy

Copy the Flat correction curve created in Audyssey ^® Setup.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Curve Copy - 1

  • “Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed.
  • "Curve Copy" cannot be used when using headphones.

Set Defaults

The "Graphic EQ" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

167

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 3

Video

Make video-related settings.

Picture Adjust

Picture quality can be adjusted.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Picture Adjust - 1

  • This can be set when "HDMI" is assigned for each input source. (184)
  • "Contrast", "Brightness", "Saturation", "Noise Reduction" and "Enhancer" can be set when "Picture Mode" is set to "Custom". (16) p. 168)
  • "Picture Adjust" settings are stored for each input source.
  • "Picture Adjust" cannot be set when 4K or 8K signals are input.
  • "Picture Adjust" can be set for devices connected to HDMI connectors 1 to 4.
  • This cannot be set when "Video Mode" is set to "Bypass" or "i/p Scaler" is set to "Off". (175 p. 175)

Picture Mode

Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and your viewing environment.

Standard:The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.
Movie:A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.
Vivid:A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
Streaming:A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
ISF Day:A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.
ISF Night:A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.
Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.
Off (Default):No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

168

MARANTZ NR1711 - Picture Mode - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Picture Mode - 2

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tips Appendix - 1

  • The two special adjustment modes, "ISF Day" and "ISF Night", should be used by a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation conditions.
    We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISF-certified technician.
  • These settings can also be configured using "Picture Mode" in the option menu. (12 p. 168)

Contrast

Adjust picture contrast.

$$ - 5 0 - + 5 0 (\text { D e f a u l t }: 0) $$

Brightness

Adjust picture brightness.

$$ - 5 0 - + 5 0 (\text { Default }: 0) $$

Saturation

Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation).

$$ - 5 0 - + 5 0 (\text { Default }: 0) $$

Noise Reduction

Reduce overall video noise.

Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)

■ Enhancer

Emphasize picture sharpness.

$$ 0 - + 1 2 (\text { Default }: 0) $$

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

169

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Enhancer - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Enhancer - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Enhancer - 3

HDMI Setup

Make settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings.

NOTE

- When "HDMI Pass Through" and "HDMI Control" is set to "On", it consumes more standby power. ("HDMI Pass Through" (170), "HDMI Control" (172)) If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

■ HDMI Audio Out

Select HDMI audio output device.

AVR(Default):Play back through speakers connected to the unit.
TV:Play back through TV connected to the unit.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ HDMI Audio Out - 1

  • When the HDMI Control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio setting. (r.p. 135)
  • When the power of this unit is on and "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", audio is output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.

■ HDMI Pass Through

Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in standby power mode.

On:Transmits the selected HDMI input through this unit's HDMI output when this unit is in standby power mode.
Off (Default):No HDMI signals are transmitted through this unit's HDMI output in standby power mode.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

170

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ HDMI Pass Through - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ HDMI Pass Through - 2

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Pass Through Source

Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby.

Last(Default):The most recently used input source will go into standby mode.
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Media Player / Game / AUX / 8K / TV Audio / CD*:Pass through the selected input source.

*“Pass Through Source” can be set when any of the HDMI connectors is assigned to “CD” for the input source in the “Input Assign” setting. (187 p. 183)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Pass Through Source - 1

- "Pass Through Source" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On" or "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On". ("HDMI Pass Through" (p. 170), "HDMI Control" (p. 172))

■ RC Source Select

Set whether to allow this unit to be turned on by the input source select button on the remote control when this unit is on standby.

Power On + Source (Default):The power of this unit is turned on and the input source changes.
Source Select Only:The HDMI input source changes while this unit is on standby. The power display of this unit blinks when the input source select button of the remote control is pressed.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ RC Source Select - 1

- "RC Source Select" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On" or "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On". ("HDMI Pass Through" (170), "HDMI Control" (172))

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

171

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ RC Source Select - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ RC Source Select - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

HDMI Control

You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and compatible with HDMI Control.

On: Use HDMI Control function.

Off

(Default):

Do not use HDMI Control function.

MARANTZ NR1711 - HDMI Control - 1

  • Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings.
  • Refer to "HDMI Control function" for more information about the HDMI Control function. (127 p. 135)

NOTE

- If the "HDMI Control" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.

ARC

On the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR connector, set whether to receive sound from the TV via HDMI.

On: Use ARC function.

Off

(Default):

Do not use ARC function.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ARC - 1

  • You can adjust the volume of this unit using the TV remote control.
  • If using this function, use a TV compatible with ARC (Audio Return Channel) and enable the HDMI Control function of the TV.
  • When "HDMI Control" is set to "On", the "ARC" settings automatically switch "On". (125 p. 172)

NOTE

  • If the "ARC" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.
  • Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of "ARC" settings in the menu.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

172

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

TV Audio Switching

Sets automatic switching to the "TV Audio" input when a TV connected via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to this unit.

On(Default):Select the “TV Audio” input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.
Off:Do not select the “TV Audio” input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.

MARANTZ NR1711 - TV Audio Switching - 1

- "TV Audio Switching" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (127 p. 172)

Power Off Control

Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.

All(Default):If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Video:With an input source being selected that is assigned either “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO”, when you turn the power of the TV off, power to this unit is automatically set to standby. (p. 184)

Off: This unit does not link with power to a TV.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Power Off Control - 1

- "Power Off Control" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (125 p. 172)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

173

MARANTZ NR1711 - Power Off Control - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Power Off Control - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Power Saving

If "TV Speaker" is set as the audio output setting of your TV, this unit is automatically set to standby mode to reduce power consumption.

This function is activated in the following cases.

  • When "TV Audio" is selected as the input source of this unit
  • When playing content from a device connected by HDMI

On: Use Power Saving function.

Off

(Default):

Do not use Power Saving function.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Power Saving - 1

- "Power Saving" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (☐ p. 172)

Smart Menu

This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control.

On: Use Smart Menu function.

Off: Do not use Smart Menu function.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Smart Menu - 1

- "Smart Menu" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (图 172)

NOTE

  • If the "Smart Menu" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.
  • The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the specifications of your TV. In this case, set "Smart Menu" to "Off".

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

174

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

Output Settings

Makes settings for video output.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Output Settings - 1

  • This can be set when "HDMI" is assigned for each input source. (184)
  • “Resolution”, “Sharpness”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect Ratio” can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to “On”. (“Resolution” (ICP p. 176), “Sharpness” (ICP p. 177), “Progressive Mode” (ICP p. 177), “Aspect Ratio” (ICP p. 178))
  • "Output Settings" cannot be set when 4K or 8K signals are input.
  • "Video Mode", "i/p Scaler", "Resolution", "Sharpness", "Progressive Mode" and "Aspect Ratio" settings are stored for each input source. ("Video Mode" (175), "i/p Scaler" (176), "Resolution" (176), "Sharpness" (177), "Progressive Mode" (177), "Aspect Ratio" (178))

Video Mode

Configure the video processing method to match the type of video content.

Auto(Default):Process video automatically based on the HDMI content information.
Game:Always process video for game content.Minimize the video delay when the video is delayed compared to the button operations on the controller of the game console.
Movie:Perform image processing that is suitable for contents other than games.
Bypass:Remove all video processing from the HDMI video path.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Video Mode - 1

  • If "Video Mode" is set to "Auto", the mode is switched according to the input contents.
  • Information displays such as the volume bar cannot be overlaid with the video signal when "Video Mode" is set to "Bypass".
  • This item can be set when "HDMI" is assigned for each input source.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

175

MARANTZ NR1711 - Video Mode - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Video Mode - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ i/p Scaler

Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p Scaler processing. i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the value set in "Resolution". (p. 176)

On: Use i/p Scaler function.

Off: Do not use i/p Scaler function.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ i/p Scaler - 1

  • This item can be set when "HDMI" is assigned for each input source.
  • This item can be set when "Video Mode" is set to anything other than "Bypass". (175)
  • This function is not effective when the input signal is "x.v.Color", 3D, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color or computer resolutions.

Resolution

Set the output resolution.

Auto(Default):The resolution supported by the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT connector is detected automatically and the appropriate output resolution is set.
480p/576p / 1080i /720p / 1080p /4K / 8K :Set the output resolution.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Resolution - 1

  • This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to "On". (16 p. 176)
  • "480p/576p", "1080i", "720p" or "1080p" can be set for devices connected to HDMI connectors 1 to 4.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

176

MARANTZ NR1711 - Resolution - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Resolution - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Sharpness

Enables the sharpness feature which enhances the edges of images when up-scaling video to 4K or 8K.

On:Enables the video enhancer sharpness feature to provide image edge contouring which is optimized for converting lower resolution standard definition video to 4K or 8K.
Off(Default):Disables the video enhancer sharpness feature.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sharpness - 1

  • This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to "On". (17 p. 176)
  • We recommend using this sharpness feature only when your TV sharpness is set to 0.

■ Progressive Mode

Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video signal.

Auto(Default):The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate mode is set.
Video: Select mode suitable for video playback.
Video and Film:Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film material playback.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Progressive Mode - 1

  • This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to "On". (10 p. 176)
  • "Progressive Mode" can be set for devices connected to HDMI connectors 1 to 4.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

177

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Progressive Mode - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Progressive Mode - 3

■ Aspect Ratio

Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.

16:9(Default):Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
4:3 :Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except for 480p/576p output)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Aspect Ratio - 1

  • This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to "On". (17 p. 176)
  • "Aspect Ratio" can be set for devices connected to HDMI connectors 1 to 4.

On Screen Display

Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.

Volume

Sets where to display the volume level.

Bottom

Display at the bottom.

(Default):

Top: Display at the top.

Off: Turn display off.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Volume - 1

- When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to "Top".

Info

Displays status of operation temporarily when the input source is switched.

On

Turn display on.

(Default):

Off: Turn display off.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

178

MARANTZ NR1711 - Info - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Info - 2

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Now Playing

Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is "HEOS Music" or "Tuner".

Always On (Default):Show display continuously.
Auto Off:Show display for 30 seconds after operation.

Screen Saver

Select the screen saver setting.

A screen saver is activated if no operation is performed for more than 5 minutes when no video signal is input or when the same screen (e.g. the setup menu) is displayed.

Use △▽◀▷ to clear the screen saver.

On: Turns screen saver on.

Off

(Default):

Turns screen saver off.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Screen Saver - 1

- The screen saver is activated in the following cases.

  • When the setup menu is displayed
  • When no video signal is input
  • When the network, USB, Bluetooth or Tuner playback screen is displayed
  • This feature will be supported via firmware update.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

179

MARANTZ NR1711 - Screen Saver - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Screen Saver - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Screen Saver - 4

4K/8K Signal Format

Set the format of 4K and 8K signal to be played back by this unit when the TV or playback device connected to this unit is HDMI 4K or 8K signal compatible.

■ 4K/8K Signal Format

Set the format of 4K and 8K signal played back by this unit.

Standard:Select if your TV and playback devices support 4K 60p 4:2:0 8 bit video signals.
Enhanced (Default):Select if your TV, playback devices, and cables support high quality 4K 60p 4:4:4 8 bit, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 10 bit video signals.
8K Enhanced:Select if your TV, playback devices, and cables support high quality 8K 60p or 4K 120p video signals.

【Relation between the "4K/8K Signal Format" setting and supported resolutions】

Support ResolutionColor SpacePixel Depth4K/8K Signal Format
Standard EEnhanced8K Enhanced
4K 24p, 4K 30p, 4K 25pRGB / YCbCr 4:4:48 bit√ √
10,12 bit –
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit√ √
4K 60p, 4K 50pYCbCr 4:2:08 bit√ √
10,12 bit –
RGB / YCbCr 4:4:48 bit –
10,12 bit –
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit –
4K 120p, 4K 100pYCbCr 4:2:08,10,12 bit
RGB / YCbCr 4:4:48,10 bit –
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit – –
8K 24p, 8K 30p, 8K 25pYCbCr 4:2:08,10,12 bit
RGB / YCbCr 4:4:48,10 bit – –
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit – –
8K 60p, 8K 50pYCbCr 4:2:0 810 bit – –

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

180

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ 4K/8K Signal Format - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ 4K/8K Signal Format - 2

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tips Appendix - 1

  • When setting this to “Enhanced”, we recommend using a “Premium High Speed HDMI Cable” or “Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet” that has an “HDMI Premium Certified Cable” label attached to the product package.
  • When setting this to "8K Enhanced", we recommend using an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable".
  • When this setting is "Enhanced" or "8K Enhanced", configure the television or playback device settings to match this setting.
  • When this setting is "Enhanced" or "8K Enhanced", video may not be output correctly depending on the connected playback device or HDMI cable. In this case, change this setting to "Standard".
  • "Custom" is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom installers has configured the HDMI signal format for this unit.
  • "4K/8K Signal Format" can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the setting.
  • Press and hold the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
    "V.Format:" appears on the display.
  • Press the main unit's DIMMER. "4K/8K:" appears on the display.
  • Use the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO and select the 4K/8K Signal Format.
  • Press the main unit's STATUS to complete the setting.

HDCP Setup

Sets the HDCP version for each HDMI input source.

Video may not be output depending on the HDCP version of your player and the TV.

If this issue occurs, use this setting to set one version of HDCP. This may be able to output video.

Auto(Default):Automatically applies the HDCP version of this unit according to TV.

1.4: Fixes the HDCP version of this unit to 1.4.
2.3: Fixes the HDCP version of this unit to 2.3.

MARANTZ NR1711 - HDCP Setup - 1

- "Custom" is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom installers has configured the HDCP version for this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

181

MARANTZ NR1711 - HDCP Setup - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - HDCP Setup - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - HDCP Setup - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

TV Format

Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.

Format

PAL

(Default):

Select PAL output.

NTSC: Select NTSC output.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Format - 1

  • "Format" can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting.
  • Press and hold the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
    "V.Format:" appears on the display.
  • Use the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO and set the video signal format.
  • Press the main unit's STATUS to complete the setting.

NOTE

- When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the picture will not be displayed properly.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

182

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Inputs

Perform settings related to input source playback.

You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.

Input Assign

By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a connected device.

Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input connector and video input connector when connecting an input source that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this unit.

Sets the audio input mode for each "INPUT MODE" source. "AUTO" is normally recommended for this setting. This automatically detects and plays signal input to this unit prioritized in the following order: HDMI > DIGITAL > ANALOG.

Inputs/Input Assign Set Defaults CBL/SAT 1 - 1 A#DEC1 AUTO DVD 2 - - COMP1 HDMI Blu-ray 3 - - - HDMI Media Player 4 - - COMP2 HDMI Game 5 COAX - A#DEC2 AUTO AUX - - 2 A#DEC3 ANALOG 8K B#RC - - - HDMI TV Audio - CPT - - GDTAL CD - 3 - Changes HDMI Input assignments

MARANTZ NR1711 - Input Assign - 2
- By default, each item is set as follows.

Input sourceInput connectorINPUT MODE
HDMI DIGITALANALOGVIDEO
CBL/SAT 1 – 1 VDEO1 AUTO
DVD 2 – COMP1 HDMI
Blu-ray 3 – –HDMI
Media Player4 – –COMP2 HDMI
Game5COAX– VIDEOO2 AUTO
AUX– – 2VIDEO3ANALOG
8K6(8K)HDMI
TV Audio –OPT– –DIGITAL
CD– – 3 –ANALOG

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

183

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Input Assign - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

☐ TV set top box/satellite users please note

When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box: To play the video signal assigned to "HDMI" combined with the audio signal assigned at "Input Assign" - "DIGITAL", you will also need to select "DIGITAL" in the "INPUT MODE".

MARANTZ NR1711 - ☐ TV set top box/satellite users please note - 1

- The same input connector can be assigned to multiple input sources. For example, assign the same HDMI input connector to multiple sources to use each input source in combination with analog or digital audio as you prefer. In such cases, set the audio connector for playback in "INPUT MODE".

HDMI

Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6(8K):Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.
- :Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.

MARANTZ NR1711 - HDMI - 1

  • Only "HDMI6" can be assigned to the "8K" input source.
  • When "HDMI Control" or "ARC" is set to "On" in the menu, "HDMI" cannot be assigned to "TV Audio". ("HDMI Control" (1 p. 172), "ARC" (1 p. 172))
  • The eARC function does not operate when "HDMI" is set as the "TV Audio" input source.

DIGITAL

Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.

COAX (Coaxial) / OPT (Optical):Assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.
- :Do not assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.

ANALOG

Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1/2/3:Assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.
-:Do not assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.

VIDEO

Set this to change the component video input connectors and composite video input connectors assigned to the input sources.

COMP1 (Component video) / COMP2 /VIDEO1 / VIDEO2 /VIDEO3:Assign the video input connector to the selected input source.
- :Do not assign a video input connector to the selected input source.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

184

MARANTZ NR1711 - VIDEO - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - VIDEO - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - VIDEO - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ INPUT MODE

Set the audio input modes for each input source.

It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to "AUTO".

AUTO(Default):Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.

HDMI: Play only signals from HDMI input.

DIGITAL: Play only signals from digital audio input.

ANALOG: Play only signals from analog audio input.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ INPUT MODE - 1

  • When digital signals are properly input, the DIG indicator lights on the display. If the DIG indicator does not light, check "Input Assign" and the connections. (127 p. 183)
  • If "HDMI Control" is set to "On" and a TV compatible with the ARC is connected via the HDMI MONITOR connectors, the input mode whose input source is "TV Audio" is fixed to ARC.
  • When an eARC function-compatible television is connected to the HDMI MONITOR connector, the input mode whose input source is "TV Audio" is fixed to eARC.

Set Defaults

The "Input Assign" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

185

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 2

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Source Rename

  • Changes the display name of the input source. Once changed, the name is displayed on the display and menu screens of this unit.
  • If the device name can be acquired from a connected HDMI device, the display name is changed automatically.
    Use this function to change names as needed when the device you are using differs from the input source on this unit.
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Media Player / Game / AUX / 8K / TV Audio / CD / Phono:Change the display name for input source.
Set Defaults:The “Source Rename” settings are returned to the default settings.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Source Rename - 1

- Up to 16 characters can be input.

Hide Sources

Remove from the display input sources that are not used.

Show

Use this source.

(Default):

Hide: Do not use this source.

Source Level

This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source's audio input.

Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.

-12 dB - +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Source Level - 1

- "Source Level" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

186

MARANTZ NR1711 - Source Level - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Source Level - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Source Level - 4

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Speakers

The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called "Audyssey® Setup".

You do not have to perform Audyssey ^® Setup when you have already performed "Speaker Calibration" in "Setup Assistant".

To set up the speakers manually, use "Manual Setup" on the menu. (☐ p. 197)

Audyssey® Setup

To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we recommend you measure in six positions, as shown in the illustration. When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound calibration microphone within 60 cm of the first measurement position (main listening position).

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audyssey® Setup - 1

- If you perform Audyssey® Setup, Audyssey MultEQ®, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume® functions are enabled. (127 p. 164)

FL SW C FR ( :Measuring positions) Listening position SRS

FL Front speaker (L)

FR Front speaker (R)

C Center speaker

SW Subwoofer

SL Surround speaker (L)

SR Surround speaker (R)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

187

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audyssey® Setup - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audyssey® Setup - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audyssey® Setup - 5

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ About the main listening position

The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound calibration microphone in the main listening position.

Audyssey MultEQ ^® uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.

NOTE

  • Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices (radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
  • During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room. Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
  • Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the Sound calibration microphone at least 50~cm away from the wall. Failure to do so will result in inaccurate readings.
  • During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
  • Operating VOLUME ▲▼ on the remote control unit or VOLUME on the main unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
  • Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

188

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup)
MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 4

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Preparation"] --> B["Measurement"]
    B --> C["Calculation & Store"]
    C --> D["Check"]
    D --> E["Finish"]

1 Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it at the main listening position.

When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.

2 If using a subwoofer capable of the following adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.

☐ When using a subwoofer with a direct mode

Set the direct mode to "On" and disable the volume adjustment and crossover frequency setting.

☐ When using a subwoofer without a direct mode

Make the following settings:

• Volume : 12 o'clock position
• Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency
- Low pass filter : Off
- Standby mode : Off

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

189

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 6

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 7

3 Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit. - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a portable electronic device with indicator lights and a hanging cable (no text or symbols)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit. - 2

When the Sound calibration microphone is connected, the following screen is displayed.

Audyssey Setup Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of your room then optimize your speakers using the included microphone and microphone stand. Set the following items if necessary. Amp Assign Channel Select Dolby Speaker Setup Start

4 Select "Start", then press ENTER.

Audyssey ^® Setup can also make the following settings.

- Amp Assign

The signals output from the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals can be switched in accordance with your speaker environment. ("Amp Assign" (197)

- Channel Select

If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring time can be reduced. You can also change the number of surround back speakers.

• Dolby Speaker Setup

Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling. This can be set when “Assign Mode” is set to “Front Dolby” or “Surround Dolby” in the “Amp Assign” settings. (p. 197)

5 Follow the instructions on the screen display and press "Next" to proceed further.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

190

MARANTZ NR1711 - Follow the instructions on the screen display and press "Next" to proceed further. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Follow the instructions on the screen display and press "Next" to proceed further. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Follow the instructions on the screen display and press "Next" to proceed further. - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

6 When the following screen is displayed, select "Begin Test" and then press ENTER.

Start the measurement of the first position.

Audyssey Setup Select "Begin Test" to start the calibration. NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and stopping during the tests. Ear Height Back Begin Test

• Measurement requires several minutes.

NOTE

- If "Caution!" is displayed on TV screen:

- Go to "Error messages" (p. 195). Check any related items, and perform the necessary procedures.

7 When the detected speaker is displayed, select "Next" and then press ENTER.

Audyssey Setup Speaker Detection Front :Yes Center :Yes Subwoofer :Yes Surround :Yes Surr. Back :No Repeat Last Test

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

191

MARANTZ NR1711 - When the detected speaker is displayed, select "Next" and then press ENTER. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - When the detected speaker is displayed, select "Next" and then press ENTER. - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - When the detected speaker is displayed, select "Next" and then press ENTER. - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

8 Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2, select "Continue", then press ENTER.

The measurement of the second position starts.

Measurements can be made in up to six positions.

Audyssey Setup Place the microphone ear level of the listener seated at the 2nd listening position, which should be no more than 60ns away from the 1st position, then select "Continue"... Ear Height Sack Continue

□ Stopping Audyssey® Setup

① Press BACK to display the popup screen.
② Press ◀ to select "Yes", then press ENTER.

9 Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 6.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 6. - 1

- To skip measuring the fourth and subsequent listening position, press ◀ to select "Complete" and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.

10 Select "Continue", then press ENTER.

Audyssey Setup Measurements complete. Select "Continue" to analyze the data... Repeat Last Test Continue

Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.

- Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The more speakers and measurement positions that there are, the more time it takes to perform the analysis.

NOTE

- When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is not turned off.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

192

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

11 Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^® .

The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the settings as preferred.

Audyssey Setup Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies and television. Turn on Dynamic EQ? Yes No Analyzing room data 0%

  • Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so that sound can be heard even at low volume.
    This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of the night.
  • Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit. Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example, the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during television programs.

12 When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit and then press "Next".

Audyssey Setup Now Analyzing and correcting your room data. Please disconnect the microphone from your AV receiver. Applying room corrections 100% Back Next

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

193

MARANTZ NR1711 - When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit and then press "Next". - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit and then press "Next". - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit and then press "Next". - 4

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tips Appendix - 1

  • When performing Audyssey® Setup for the first time, the measurement data is automatically saved to "Preset 1" of "Speaker Preset".
  • If Audyssey® Setup has already been performed, the following "Speaker Preset" selection screen is displayed.

Audyssey Setup Select which Preset to use, Preset 1 is already used, selecting Preset 1 now will overwrite the previously stored setting. Preset 1 Preset 2 Analyzing room data 0% Back

- See "Speaker Preset" for detailed information on the Speaker Preset function. (10 p. 207)

13 Select "Details" and press ENTER to verify the measurement results.

- Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers.

NOTE

- Do not enable new speakers in speaker configuration menu after Audyssey® Setup. If it is changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the optimum equalizer settings.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

194

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Error messages

An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.

Examples Error detailsMeasures
No speakers found.Sound calibration microphone is not detected.Not all speakers could be detected.Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or level is too lowThere is too much noise in the room.Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low.Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.Adjust the subwoofer's volume.
Front R : NoneThe displayed speaker could not be detected.Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Front R : PhaseThe displayed speaker is connected with the polarity reversed.Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the connection is correct, press to select “Ignore”, then press ENTER.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

195

MARANTZ NR1711 - Error messages - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Error messages - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Error messages - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings

If you set "Restore..." to "Restore", you can return to Audyssey® Setup measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ®) even when you have changed each setting manually.

Audyssey Setup Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of your room then optimize your speakers using the included microphone and microphone stand. Set the following items if necessary. Amp Assign Channel Select Dolby Speaker Setup Check Results Restore... Start

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

196

MARANTZ NR1711 - Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings - 3

Manual Setup

Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey® Setup.

  • If you enable new speakers in the speaker configuration menu after performing Audyssey® Setup, you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ®, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (164)
  • Changing the following settings: Speaker size (Large or Small) / Distances / Levels / Crossovers settings will not disable Audyssey® or require running Audyssey® Setup again.
  • "Manual Setup" can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.

Amp Assign

Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system. See "Speaker configuration and "Amp Assign" settings" (p. 40) regarding the speaker configuration and connection.

Assign Mode

Select how to use the power amp.

Surround Back (Default):Setting for 7.1-channel playback using surround back speakers.
Front Height:Setting for 7.1-channel playback using front height speakers.
Top Front:Setting for 7.1-channel playback using top front speakers.
Top Middle:Setting for 7.1-channel playback using top middle speakers.
Front Dolby:Setting for 7.1-channel playback using front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
Surround Dolby:Setting for 7.1-channel playback using surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

197

MARANTZ NR1711 - Assign Mode - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Assign Mode - 2

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

ZONE2:Setting to assign the unit’s built-in power amplifier for ZONE2 and output the audio in stereo.
Bi-Amp:Setting to use the front speakers via the bi-amp connection.
Front B:Setting for playback using a second front speaker. You can switch the playback between front speaker A and B according to your liking. Switch the front speaker using “Front Speaker” in the menu.(p. 207)

Speaker Config.

Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low bass frequencies and speaker size.

Front

Set the front speaker size.

Large(Default):Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small:Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Front - 1

  • When "Subwoofer" is set to "No", "Front" is automatically set to "Large".
  • When "Front" is set to "Small", you cannot set speakers other than "Front" to "Large".

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

198

MARANTZ NR1711 - Front - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Front - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Center

Set the presence and size of the center speaker.

Large:Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small(Default):Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:Select when a center speaker is not connected.

Subwoofer

Set the presence of a subwoofer.

Yes(Default):Use a subwoofer.
No:Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Subwoofer - 1

- When "Subwoofer" is set to "No" and you set "Front" to "Small", "Subwoofer" is automatically set to "Yes".

■ Surround

Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.

Large:Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:Select when the surround speakers are not connected.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Surround - 1

- When "Surround" is set to "None", "Surr. Back" and "Surround Dolby" are automatically set to "None".

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

199

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Surround - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Surround - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Surr. Back

Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.

Large:Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small(Default):Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.
2 spkrs(Default):Use two surround back speakers.
1 spkr:Use only one surround back speaker. Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND BACK when this setting is selected.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Surr. Back - 1

- When "Assign Mode" setting is "Surround Back", you can make this setting. (197 p. 197)

Front Height

Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.

Large:Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:Select when the front height speakers are not connected.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Front Height - 1

- When "Assign Mode" setting is "Front Height", you can make this setting. (125 p. 197)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

200

MARANTZ NR1711 - Front Height - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Front Height - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Front Height - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Top Front

Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.

Large:Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small(Default):Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:Select when the top front speakers are not connected.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Top Front - 1

- When "Assign Mode" setting is "Top Front", you can make this setting. (p. 197)

Top Middle

Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.

Large:Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:Select when the top middle speakers are not connected.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Top Middle - 1

- When "Assign Mode" setting is "Top Middle", you can make this setting. (197)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

201

MARANTZ NR1711 - Top Middle - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Top Middle - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Top Middle - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Front Dolby

Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.

Large:Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small(Default):Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:Select when the front Dolby speakers are not connected.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Front Dolby - 1

- When "Assign Mode" setting is "Front Dolby", you can make this setting. (197)

■ Surround Dolby

Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.

Large:Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:Select when the surround Dolby speakers are not connected.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Surround Dolby - 1

- When "Assign Mode" setting is "Surround Dolby", you can make this setting. (p. 197)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

202

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Surround Dolby - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Surround Dolby - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Surround Dolby - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Distances

Set distance from listening position to speakers.

Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker.

Unit

Set the unit of distance.

Meters (Default)

Feet

Step

Set the minimum variable width of the distance.

0.1 m / 0.01 m (Default: 0.1 m)

1 ft / 0.1 ft

■ Set the distance

0.00 m - 18.00 m / 0.0 ft - 60.0 ft

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Set the distance - 1

  • The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the "Amp Assign" and "Speaker Config." settings. ("Amp Assign" (p. 197), "Speaker Config." (p. 198))
  • Default settings: Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / Center / Front Dolby L / Front Dolby R / Subwoofer: 3.60 m (12.0 ft) Speakers other than the above: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
  • Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 6.00 m (20.0 ft).

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

203

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Set the distance - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Set the distance - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Dolby Speaker Setup

Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling.

0.90 m - 3.30 m / 3.0 ft - 11.0 ft

(Default : 1.80 m / 6.0 ft)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Dolby Speaker Setup - 1

- This can be set when "Front Dolby" or "Surround Dolby" is set to "Large" or "Small" in "Speaker Config.".

Set Defaults

The "Distances" settings are returned to the default settings.

Levels

Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position when it is output from each speaker.

■ Test Tone Start

A test tone is output from the selected speaker.

While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the selected speaker.

-12.0 dB - +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Test Tone Start - 1

  • The set "Levels" are reflected in all sound modes.
  • If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the settings in "Channel Level Adjust". (17 p. 117)
  • When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you cannot set "Levels".

Set Defaults

The "Levels" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

204

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Crossovers

Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.

■ Speaker Selection

Selects how to set the crossover frequency.

All(Default):Sets the same crossover frequency for all speakers.
Individual:Selects the crossover points for each speaker individually.

■ Set the crossover frequency

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Set the crossover frequency - 1

  • "Crossovers" can be set when the "Subwoofer Mode" setting is "LFE+Main", or when you have a speaker that is set to "Small". (12) p. 206
  • The default crossover frequency is "80 Hz", which will work best with the widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to "250 Hz" when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz – 20 kHz.
  • Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the speakers set in "Small". This cut off bass frequency is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.
  • The speakers that can be set when "Individual" is selected differ depending on to the "Subwoofer Mode" setting. (12 p. 206)
  • When "LFE" is selected, speakers set to "Small" at "Speaker Config." can be set. If the speakers are set to "Large", "Full Band" is displayed and the setting cannot be made. (p. 198)
  • When "LFE+Main" is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the "Speaker Config." setting. (198 p. 198)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

205

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Set the crossover frequency - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Set the crossover frequency - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Bass

Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.

Subwoofer Mode

Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

LFE(Default):The low range signal of the channel set to “Small” speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
LFE+Main:The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Subwoofer Mode - 1

  • "Subwoofer Mode" can be set when "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" on the menu is set to other than "No". (19 p. 199)
  • Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
  • If "Speaker Config." - "Front" and "Center" are set to "Large", and "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "LFE", no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. (18) p. 198) Select "LFE+Main" if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.

LPF for LFE

Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.

80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 120 Hz)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

206

MARANTZ NR1711 - LPF for LFE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - LPF for LFE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - LPF for LFE - 3

Front Speaker

Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.

A

Front speaker A is used.

(Default):

B : Front speaker B is used.

A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Front Speaker - 1

- This can be set when "Assign Mode" is set to "Front B". (1 p. 198)

Speaker Preset

Two speaker settings can be saved to suit the environments where you use your speakers.

For example, you can configure two presets easily to switch between equalizer or speaker settings measured using Audyssey® Setup if the characteristics of your room differ depending on factors such as whether you use the screen.

If you want to use a preset, select the preset you want to use and then configure settings such as Audyssey® Setup or the speaker settings to save those settings to the preset you have selected.

Preset 1

Saves the settings to Preset 1.

(Default):

Preset 2: Saves the settings to Preset 2.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker Preset - 1

- The following settings are saved to presets.

- "Amp Assign" settings

- "Speaker Config." settings

- "Distances" settings

- "Levels" settings

- "Crossovers" settings

- "Bass" settings

- "Front Speaker" settings

- "MultEQ®" data

- "Graphic EQ" data

- This setting also be configured using "Speaker Preset" in the option menu. (125 p. 122)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

207

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker Preset - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker Preset - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker Preset - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Network

To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.

If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set "DHCP" to "On". (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).

When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the "IP Address" settings, and enter

information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.

Information

Display network information.

Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address / MAC Address (Ethernet) / MAC Address (Wi-Fi) / Wi-Fi signal strength

Connection

Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN.

When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select "Wired (Ethernet)" after connecting a LAN cable.

When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select "Wireless (Wi-Fi)" and configure the "Wi-Fi Setup". (127 p. 209)

Connect Using

Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).

Wired (Ethernet): Use a LAN cable to connect to a network.

Wireless (Wi-Fi) (Default): Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect to a network.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

208

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connect Using - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connect Using - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Connect Using - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Wi-Fi Setup

Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router.

The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection method to suit your home environment.

■ Scan Networks

Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible networks shown on the TV screen.

  1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless networks.

Select "Rescan" if the network cannot be found.

  1. Enter your password and select "OK".

■ Use iOS Device

Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By connecting your iOS device to this unit using Wi-Fi, the unit can be automatically connected to the same network as your device.

  1. Select "Use iOS Device" on the TV screen.
  2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router and select "Marantz NR1711" from "SET UP NEW AIRPLAY SPEAKER..." at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration screen of your iOS device.
  3. Tap "Next" on the screen of the iOS device.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Use iOS Device - 1

- The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 7 or later.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

209

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Use iOS Device - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Use iOS Device - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Use iOS Device - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

WPS Router

Use a WPS-compatible router to connect using the push button method.

  1. Select "Push Button" on the TV screen.
  2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the router you wish to connect to.
  3. The time for pressing the button varies depending on the router.
  4. Select "Connect" on the TV screen within 2 minutes.

■ Manual

Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to connect to.

  1. Set the following items.
SSID:Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).
Security:Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using.

Password: Input the password.

  1. Select "Connect" at the end of the setting.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

210

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Manual - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Manual - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Manual - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tips Appendix - 1

  • The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.
  • Press and hold the M-DAX and SOUND MODE buttons on the main unit for at least 3 seconds when the power of the unit is on.
  • Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to "Marantz NR1711" when the message "Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called "Marantz NR1711"." appears in the display.
  • Start up the browser and enter "192.168.1.16/settings/" in the URL.
  • Use the browser to enter the settings, select "Connect" and then exit the settings.
  • The Default key of this unit is fixed at "1". Set Default key of the router to "1" to use.

Settings

Configure the IP address.

  • If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information required for network connection such as the IP address will be automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to "On" in the default settings of this unit.
  • Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting to a network without DHCP function.

Network/Settings DHCF Off -IP Address 000.000.000.000 -Subnet Mask 000.000.000.000 -Default Gateway 000.000.000.000 -DNS 000.000.000.000 Save Cancel Configures the network settings automatically or manually

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

211

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

DHCP

Selects how to connect to the network.

On(Default):Configure the network settings automatically from your router.

Off: Configure the network settings manually.

IP Address

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.

- The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.

CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254

CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254

CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254

Subnet Mask

When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input "255.255.255.0".

■ Default Gateway

When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.

DNS

Enter the DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider.

MARANTZ NR1711 - DNS - 1

  • If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings. (tF p. 65)
  • If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

212

MARANTZ NR1711 - DNS - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - DNS - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - DNS - 4

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Network Control

Enables network communication in standby power mode.

Off In Standby (Default):Suspend network function during standby.
Always On:Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network compatible controller.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Network Control - 1

- When using the web control function, Marantz 2016 AVR Remote App or HEOS App, use with the "Network Control" setting set to "Always On".

NOTE

- When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more standby power.

Friendly Name

The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

■ Friendly Name

Selects Friendly Name from the list.

When you select "Other", you can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

Home Theater /Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room / Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den / Office / Other

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Friendly Name - 1

  • Up to 30 characters can be input.
  • The default Friendly Name on first use is "Marantz NR1711".

Set Defaults

Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default setting.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

213

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Set Defaults - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Diagnostics

Used to check the network connection.

■ Physical Connection

Checks the physical LAN port connection.

OK

Error:The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Physical Connection - 1

- When connected using a wireless LAN, "Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)" will be displayed.

Router Access

Checks the connection from this unit to the router.

OK

Error:Failed to communicate with the router.Check the router settings.

Internet Access

Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).

OK
Error:Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection environment or router settings.

AirPlay

Settings for Apple AirPlay.

On(Default):Enables Apple AirPlay.

Off: Disables Apple AirPlay.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

214

MARANTZ NR1711 - AirPlay - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - AirPlay - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - AirPlay - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

HEOS Account

Make HEOS Account-related settings.

HEOS Account is needed in order to use HEOS Favorites.

The menu displayed differs depending on the status of the HEOS Account.

You have not signed in

I have a HEOS Account

If you already have a HEOS Account, enter the current account name and password to sign in.

■ Create Account

If you do not have a HEOS Account, create a new HEOS Account.

■ Forgot Password

If you have forgotten the password, an email explaining how to reset the password will be sent.

You have already signed in

■ Signed in As

The currently signed in HEOS Account is displayed.

■ Change Location

Change the regional settings for the signed in HEOS Account.

■ Change Password

Change the password for the signed in HEOS Account.

Delete Account

Delete the signed in HEOS Account.

■ Sign Out

Sign out from the HEOS Account.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

215

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Sign Out - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Sign Out - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Sign Out - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

General

Make various other settings.

Language

Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.

English / Deutsch / Français / Italiano / Español / Nederlands / Svenska / Русский / Polski (Default : English)

MARANTZ NR1711 - Language - 1

- "Language" can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings.

  1. Press and hold the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "V.Format:" appears on the display.
  2. Press DIMMER on the main unit twice. "Lang.:" appears on the display.
  3. Use the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE or INTERNET RADIO and set the language.
  4. Press the main unit's STATUS to complete the setting.

ECO

Configure the ECO Mode and auto standby mode settings.

ECO Mode

This mode can reduce the power consumption and heat generation of this unit when power on.

This is done by reducing the power supply line to the power amplifier, in turn the maximum power output.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

216

MARANTZ NR1711 - ECO Mode - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ECO Mode - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ECO Mode - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

On:Power savings are always active, regardless of volume or input signal.
Auto(Default):Gives you the best balance between power savings and maximum power output:For low volume levels, the power savings are active. If you increase the volume level, the power savings are switched off automatically, so you can enjoy maximum output power without distortion.If the volume is set to a high level but no input signal is detected for more than 2 minutes, this unit will enable power savings. When an input signal is detected again or the input source is changed, this unit will automatically turn off power savings again at high volume levels.
Off:No power savings.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tips Appendix - 1

  • When the unit is switching between the different power saving states in "ECO Mode: Auto", you may notice a click noise from the inside of this unit, this is normal.
  • If content is paused for more than 2 minutes and playback is resumed from the same source at these high volume levels, there may be short delay before maximum power is restored.
  • "ECO Mode" can also be switched by pressing ECO on the remote control unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

217

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tips Appendix - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Tips Appendix - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Power On Default

Set the mode to ECO when the power is on.

Last (Default):The ECO Mode will be set to the previous setting before the power was switched off.
On:When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in “On”.
Auto:When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in “Auto”.
Off:When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in “Off”.

■ On Screen Display

Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV screen.

Always On:Always display the meter on the TV screen.
Auto(Default):Display the meter when changing the mode or volume.
Off: Do not display the meter.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

218

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ On Screen Display - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ On Screen Display - 2

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Auto Standby

Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.

MAIN ZONE

Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or video signals input into this unit.

Before the unit enters standby mode, "Auto Standby" is displayed on the unit display and the menu screen.

60 min:The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes.
30 min:The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes.
15 min(Default):The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes.
Off:The unit does not go into standby automatically.

ZONE2

When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here, the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.

8 hours:Switches ZONE2 the standby state after about 8 hours.
4 hours:Switches ZONE2 to the standby state after about 4 hours.
2 hours:Switches ZONE2 to the standby state after about 2 hours.
Off(Default):Does not automatically switch ZONE2 to the standby state.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

219

MARANTZ NR1711 - ZONE2 - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ZONE2 - 2

Bluetooth Transmitter

Sets this unit's Bluetooth transmitter.

Set to use Bluetooth headphones to listen to audio playing in the MAIN ZONE.

Transmitter

Enables or disables the Bluetooth transmitter.

Off(Default):Disables the Bluetooth transmitter feature.

On: Enables the Bluetooth transmitter feature.

Output Mode

Selects the audio output method.

Bluetooth + Speakers (Default):Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones and main zone speakers.
Bluetooth Only:Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones only.

■ Connected device

Displays the Bluetooth device connected to this unit.

Device List

Available devices are displayed in the list once you start pairing mode on the Bluetooth headphones you want to connect. Select your Bluetooth headphones from the list to pair them.

This unit can only pair with one Bluetooth headphone at a time. However, up to 8 Bluetooth headphones can be registered. Switch between registered devices from Device List in the "Bluetooth Transmitter" setup menu.

To remove a saved Bluetooth device from the list, use the buttons to select it, then press the OPTION button and select "Forget This Device".

MARANTZ NR1711 - Device List - 1

  • "Output Mode" can also be set from "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the option menu.
  • A2DP profile-compatible Bluetooth speakers can be connected following the same steps used to connect Bluetooth headphones.

NOTE

  • Bluetooth transmitter and Bluetooth receiver function cannot be used at the same time. Settings in this menu are not available when listening to music on a Bluetooth device in any zone.
  • Even when "Transmitter" is set to "On", press Bluetooth on the remote control to select the "Bluetooth" source and enable the Bluetooth receiver function. To listen to music stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones on this unit, press Bluetooth on the remote control to switch the input source to Bluetooth, then reconnect the Bluetooth device.
  • Menu settings for Bluetooth Transmitter are not available when this unit is grouped within the HEOS App.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

220

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

ZONE2 Setup

Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ZONE2 Setup - 1

  • Values set for "Volume Limit" and "Power On Volume" are displayed according to the setting specified for the volume "Scale". (16) p. 163
  • This can be set when "Assign Mode" is set to "ZONE2". (p. 198)

Lch Level

Adjust the left channel output level.

-12 dB - +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

Rch Level

Adjust the right channel output level.

-12 dB - +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

Volume Level

Set the volume output level.

Variable(Default):Volume can be adjusted.
1 – 98(-79 dB – 18 dB):Volume is fixed at the desired level. The volume cannot be adjusting using the remote control unit.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Volume Level - 1

  • The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is “-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB”. (Tp p. 163)

Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

60 - 80 (-20 dB - 0 dB)

(Default : 70 (-10 dB))

Off: Do not set a maximum volume.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Volume Limit - 1

  • This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (☐ p. 221)
  • The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (ICP p. 163)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

221

MARANTZ NR1711 - Volume Limit - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Volume Limit - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Volume Limit - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Power On Volume

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Last(Default):Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Mute: Always mute when power is turned on.
1 – 98(-79 dB – 18 dB):The volume is adjusted to the set level.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Power On Volume - 1

  • This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (16 p. 221)
  • The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (12p. 163)

Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

Full(Default):The sound is muted entirely.

-40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
-20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Zone Rename

Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.

MAIN ZONE / ZONE2

Set Defaults:The default setting is restored for the edited zone name.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Zone Rename - 1

- Up to 10 characters can be input.

Smart Select Names

Change the smart select name that appears on the TV screen to one you prefer.

Smart Select 1 / Smart Select 2 / Smart Select 3 / Smart Select 4

Set Defaults:The default setting is restored for the edited smart select name.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Smart Select Names - 1

- Up to 16 characters can be input.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

222

MARANTZ NR1711 - Smart Select Names - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Smart Select Names - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Smart Select Names - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Trigger Out

Select the conditions for activating trigger out.

For details about how to connect the DC OUT jack, see "DC OUT jack" (Kp. 68).

☐ When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2)

Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to "On".

☐ When setting for input source

Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to "On".

MARANTZ NR1711 - ☐ When setting for input source - 1

- It is valid for the zone, which is set to "On" and "When setting for zone".

On: Activate trigger on this mode.

-- -: Do not activate trigger on this mode.

Front Display

Makes settings related to the display on this unit.

Dimmer

Adjust the display brightness of this unit.

Bright

Normal display brightness.

(Default):

Dim: Reduced display brightness.

Dark: Very low display brightness.

Off: Turns the display off.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Dimmer - 1

- You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

223

MARANTZ NR1711 - Dimmer - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Dimmer - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Firmware

Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for upgrades.

■ Check for Update

Check for firmware updates.

The firmware can be updated if a firmware update has been released.

Update Now:Execute the update process. When the update starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the progress is shown on the display.

Update Later: Update later.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Check for Update - 1

  • This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If an update still cannot be performed, an "Update Error" message appears in the display. See "Troubleshooting" – "Update/upgrade error messages" for information on update error messages. (12) p. 254)
    Check the conditions according to the message and try the update again.
  • This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

■ Auto-Update

Turns on Automatic Updates so that futures updates are automatically downloaded and installed when this unit is in standby mode.

Auto-Update

This unit will automatically update to the newest firmware when in standby mode.

On: Turns on Automatic Updates.

Off

(Default):

Turns off Automatic Updates.

Time Zone

Change the time zone.

Set the time zone that matches the area where you live.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Time Zone - 1

- This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

224

MARANTZ NR1711 - Time Zone - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Time Zone - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Time Zone - 4

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Allow Update

Enable or disable updates and upgrades for this unit.

On(Default):Enables this unit to receive updates and upgrades.
Off:Prevents this unit from receiving update and upgrade.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Allow Update - 1

- This setting causes Incompatibilities between this unit and HEOS App.

■ Upgrade Notification

When the latest Upgrade firmware is available, a notification message is displayed on the TV screen at power on.

The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the power is turned on.

On

(Default):

Display upgrade message.

Off: Do not display upgrade message.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Upgrade Notification - 1

- This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

225

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Upgrade Notification - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Upgrade Notification - 3

■ Add New Feature

Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform an upgrade.

Upgrade Package: Display the items to be upgraded.

Upgrade Status:Display a list of the additional functions provided by the upgrade.
Upgrade:Execute the upgrade process.When the upgrade starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade time which has elapsed is displayed.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Add New Feature - 1

  • Information regarding the "Update" function and "Add New Feature" will be announced on the Marantz website each time related plans are defined. See the Marantz website for details about upgrades.
  • When the procedure is complete, "Registered" is displayed in this menu and upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, "----" is displayed.

The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the procedure.

The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit's STATUS and SOUND MODE for at least 3 seconds.

  • If the upgrade is not successful, "Upgrade Error" message appears in the display. See "Troubleshooting" – "Update/upgrade error messages" for information on upgrade error messages. (12) p. 254) Check the settings and network environment and then perform the upgrade again.
  • This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

Notes concerning use of "Update" and "Add New Feature"

  • In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (12 p. 65)
  • Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
  • Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure to be completed.
  • Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore, there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters, etc., set on this unit.
  • If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the ⏻ on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. After about 1 minute, "Please wait" appears on the display and update restarts. If the error continues, check the network environment.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

226

MARANTZ NR1711 - Notes concerning use of "Update" and "Add New Feature" - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Notes concerning use of "Update" and "Add New Feature" - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Notes concerning use of "Update" and "Add New Feature" - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Information

Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

Audio

Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.

Sound Mode: The currently set sound mode.

Input Signal: The input signal type.

Format:The number of input signal channels (presence of front, surround, LFE).
Sample Rate: The input signal's sampling frequency.
Offset:The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag:This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel.“MATRIX” is displayed with DTS-ES Matrix input signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete signals.

Video

Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for MAIN ZONE.

HDMI Signal Info.

Resolution / HDR / Color Space / Pixel Depth / ALLM / QMS / QFT

HDMI Monitor

Interface / HDR / Resolutions / Enhanced Features

MARANTZ NR1711 - Video - 1

- A or B may be displayed at the end of resolution. A represents uncompressed video and B represents compressed video.

ZONE

Show information about current settings.

MAIN ZONE:This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs according to the input source.
ZONE2:This item shows information about settings for ZONE2.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

227

MARANTZ NR1711 - ZONE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ZONE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ZONE - 3

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Firmware

Version:

Displays information for the current firmware.

DTS Version: Displays the current DTS version.

Notifications

Displays and sets notifications.

Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is turned on.

Notification Alerts

On

Notification messages are displayed.

(Default):

Off: Notification messages are not displayed.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Notification Alerts - 1

- Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume, sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.

SOURCE: Blu-ray SOURCE: Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD DOLBY: Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD PROPENSE: MultEQ : Reference Dynamic EQ : On Dynamic Volume : Medium 50.0

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

In

228

MARANTZ NR1711 - Notification Alerts - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Notification Alerts - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Notification Alerts - 5

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Usage Data

To help us improve our products and customer service, Marantz collects anonymous information about how you use this unit (such as frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings).

Marantz will never provide any information we collect to third parties.

Yes:Provide information on the operating status of this unit.
No:Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.

Save & Load

Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Save &amp; Load - 1

  • Use a USB memory device that has at least 128 MB of free space and is formatted to FAT32. Data may not Save/Load correctly to some USB memory devices.
  • It may take up to 10 minutes for data to Save/Load. Do not turn off the power until the process is complete.

■ Save Configuration

Current unit settings are stored on the USB memory device.

When the settings are saved correctly, "Saved" appears on the display and the file "config.avr" is created on the USB memory device.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Save Configuration - 1

- Do not change the file name of the created file. Doing so will prevent the file from being recognized as a settings file when restoring.

Load Configuration

Settings saved on the USB memory device are restored.

When the saved settings are restored correctly, "Loaded" appears on the display and the unit automatically restarts.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

229

MARANTZ NR1711 - Load Configuration - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Load Configuration - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Load Configuration - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Setup Lock

Protect settings from inadvertent changes.

Lock

On: Turn protection on.

Off

(Default):

Turn protection off.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Lock - 1

- When cancelling the setting, set "Lock" to "Off".

NOTE

- When "Lock" is set to "On", no setting items are displayed except for "Setup Lock".

Reset

Returns settings to the factory default.

Initialization can be performed for all unit settings or for Network settings only.

All Settings

All settings are reset to the factory default values.

■ Network Settings

Only network settings are reset to the factory default values.

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Network Settings - 1

  • Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (p. 229)
  • The "Reset" operation can also be performed by using the button on the main unit. For details on resetting all of the settings to the factory defaults see "Resetting factory settings" (127 p. 255), and for details on resetting the network settings to the factory defaults see "Resetting network settings" (127 p. 256).

NOTE

- Do not disconnect the power or turn the device off during network settings initialization.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

230

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Limiting the operating zone with the remote control

ZONE2 ZONE SELECT FUSURES ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OCC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOCC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOOC ON/OOUC ON/OOUC ON/OOUC ON/OOUC ON/OOUC ON/OOUC ON/OOUC ON/OOUC ON/OOUC ON/1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

ZONE2 operations can be disabled using the remote control.

1 Press and hold ZONE2 and SETUP. The MAIN and ZONE2 buttons blink.
■ Canceling the settings
1 Press and hold ZONE2 and SETUP while configuring the setting. The MAIN and ZONE2 buttons blink and the setting is canceled.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

231

MARANTZ NR1711 - Limiting the operating zone with the remote control - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Limiting the operating zone with the remote control - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Limiting the operating zone with the remote control - 4

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Contents

Tips

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 233
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 233
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 233
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 233
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level 233
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies 233
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new one 234
I want to combine a desired video with the current music 234
I want to skip unused input sources 234
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 234
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a game on my game console 234
I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control 234

Troubleshooting

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 236
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 237
Display on this unit shows nothing 237
No sound comes out 238
Desired sound does not come out239
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs242
No video is shown on the TV243
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV245
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal245
AirPlay cannot be played back246
USB memory devices cannot be played back247
Bluetooth cannot be played back248
The Internet radio cannot be played back250
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back251
Various online services cannot be played252
The HDMI Control function does not work252
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network253
Update/upgrade error messages254

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

232

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Contents - 1

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Tips

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake

- Set the volume upper limit for “Volume Limit” in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake. You can set this for each zone. (“Volume” (p. 163), “Volume Limit” (p. 221))

I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on

- By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume level, set the volume level at power on for "Power On Volume" in the menu. You can set this for each zone. ("Volume" (p. 163), "Power On Volume" (p. 222))

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio

- Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”, you can have the subwoofer always output audio. (p. 206)

I want to make human voices in the movies clearer

- Use "Center Level Adjust" in the menu to adjust the level. (☐ p. 157)

I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level

- Set “Dynamic EQ” in the menu to “On”. This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost even during playback at a lower volume level. (p. 165)

I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies

- Set “Dynamic Volume” in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted to your desired level. (p. 166)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

233

MARANTZ NR1711 - I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new one

- Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (p. 187)

I want to combine a desired video with the current music

- Set "Video Select" in the option menu to "On". You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, HEOS Music, USB or Bluetooth. (127 p. 119)

I want to skip unused input sources

- Set unused input sources for "Hide Sources" in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the INPUT SELECTOR knob on this unit. (16 p. 186)

I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.

- Set "All Zone Stereo" in the option menu to "Start". You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2) that is played back in MAIN ZONE. (127 p. 121)

I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a game on my game console

- When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set "Video Mode" in the menu to "Game". (p. 175)

I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control

  • Select "AV Receiver" in a TV menu such as "Input"* or "Operate Connected HDMI Device"*. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. This Smart Menu can be operated using the remote control of your TV.
    * The selection method differs depending on your TV. See the owner's manual of your TV for details.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

234

MARANTZ NR1711 - Appendix - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Appendix - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Appendix - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Troubleshooting

If a problem should arise, first check the following:

  1. Are the connections correct?
  2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner's manual?
  3. Are the other devices operating properly?

MARANTZ NR1711 - Troubleshooting - 1

- If steps 1 to 3 above do not improve the problem, restarting the device may improve the problem.

Continue pressing the ⏻ button on the unit until "Restart" appears in the display, or remove and re-insert the power cord of the unit.

If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section.

If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

235

MARANTZ NR1711 - Troubleshooting - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Troubleshooting - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Troubleshooting - 4

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off

Power does not turn on.

- Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. (☐ p. 69)

Power automatically turns off.

  • The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. (p. 138)
  • "Auto Standby" is set. "Auto Standby" is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To disable "Auto Standby", set "Auto Standby" on the menu to "Off". (12 p. 219)

Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 2 seconds.

  • The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off, wait about an hour until this unit cools down sufficiently, and then turn the power on again. (17 p. 276)
  • Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation.

Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 0.5 seconds.

  • Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable core wires came in contact with each other or a core wire was disconnected from the connector and came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire. (129 p. 36)
  • Turn down the volume and turn on the power again. (☐ p. 71)
  • This unit's amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center.

Power does not turn off even when the power button is pressed, and the display shows "ZONE2 On".

- The power supply of ZONE2 is turned to ON. To turn off the power supply of this unit (standby), press the ZONE2 ON/OFF on the main unit, or press the POWER ◊ button after pressing the ZONE2 button on the remote control unit to turn off the power supply of ZONE2.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

236

MARANTZ NR1711 - Power does not turn off even when the power button is pressed, and the display shows "ZONE2 On". - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Power does not turn off even when the power button is pressed, and the display shows "ZONE2 On". - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Power does not turn off even when the power button is pressed, and the display shows "ZONE2 On". - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit.

  • Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. (p. 9)
  • Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30^ . (1-6 p. 9)
  • Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit.
  • Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the and marks. (1) p. 9)
  • The set's remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.
  • The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit. Press the MAIN or ZONE2 button to select the operating zone of the remote control. (156)
  • When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of infrared communications between units (such as TV and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect operations from the remote control unit of this unit.

Display on this unit shows nothing

Display is off.

  • Set "Dimmer" on the menu to something other than "Off". (p. 223)
  • When the sound mode is set to "Pure Direct", the display is off. (☐ p. 125)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

237

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display is off. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display is off. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Display is off. - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

No sound comes out

No sound comes out of speakers.

  • Check the connections for all devices. (☐ p. 36)
  • Insert connection cables all the way in.
  • Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.
  • Check cables for damage.
  • Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the metal part on speaker terminals. (1 p. 36)
  • Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness. (p. 36)
  • Check that a proper input source is selected. (p. 71)
  • Adjust the volume. (1 p. 72)
  • Cancel the mute mode. (☐ p. 72)
  • Check the digital audio input connector setting. (p. 183)
  • Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output is set to off by default.
  • When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector.
  • Audio is output to your Bluetooth headphones, but not to speakers or pre-outs when "Output Mode" set to "Bluetooth Only". Change "Output Mode" to "Bluetooth + Speakers" to output audio from your Bluetooth headphones as well as your speakers or pre-outs. (15 p. 220)

No sound comes out when using the DVI-D connection.

- When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a separate audio connection.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

238

MARANTZ NR1711 - No sound comes out when using the DVI-D connection. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - No sound comes out when using the DVI-D connection. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - No sound comes out when using the DVI-D connection. - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Desired sound does not come out

The volume does not increase.

  • The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using "Limit" on the menu. (☐ p. 163)
  • Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings, so the volume may not reach the upper limit.

The volume of Bluetooth headphones does not decrease.

- Bluetooth headphones volume cannot be adjusted from this unit. Use a Bluetooth headphones with volume adjustment.

No sound comes out with the HDMI connection.

  • Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. (p. 53)
  • When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set "HDMI Audio Out" on the menu to "AVR". To output from the TV, set "TV". (17) p. 170)
  • When using the HDMI Control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. (12 p. 135)

When an eARC function-compatible television is connected, television audio is not output from the speaker connected to this unit

  • eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this setting exists on your television. For more information, check your television's owner's manual.
  • Make sure the input source of this unit is "TV Audio".
  • The eARC function does not operate when the HDMI input connector is set to the "TV Audio" input source. To enable eARC function operation, remove the HDMI input connector setting, then restart this unit and the television. (184)

No sound comes out of a specific speaker.

  • Check that speaker cables are properly connected.
  • Check that a selection other than "None" is set for the "Speaker Config." setting in menu. (198)
  • Check the "Assign Mode" setting in the menu. (p. 197)
  • When the sound mode is "Stereo" and "Virtual", audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer.
  • Audio is not output from the surround back speaker if "Speaker Virtualizer" is set to "On" when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is set to "1 spkr" in the menu. (p. 160)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

239

MARANTZ NR1711 - No sound comes out of a specific speaker. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - No sound comes out of a specific speaker. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - No sound comes out of a specific speaker. - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

No sound is produced from subwoofer.

  • Check the subwoofer connections.
  • Turn on the subwoofer's power.
  • Set "Speaker Config." – "Subwoofer" on the menu to "Yes". (199)
  • When "Speaker Config." - "Front" in the menu is set to "Large", depending on the input signal and the sound mode, no sound may be output from the subwoofer. (p. 199)
  • When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the subwoofer. (p. 206)
  • You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the "Subwoofer Mode" to "LFE+Main". (p. 206)

DTS sound is not output.

- Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to "DTS".

Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus audio is not output.

• Make HDMI connections. (☐ p. 57)
- Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, "PCM" is set by default.

DTS Neural:X mode cannot be selected.

- DTS Neural:X cannot be selected when using the headphones.

Dolby Surround mode cannot be selected.

- Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones.

Sound modes other than "Stereo" or "Direct" cannot be selected.

- Only "Stereo" or "Direct" can be selected for the sound mode if Headphone:X signals are input.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

240

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Audyssey MultEQ ^® , Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^® cannot be selected.

  • These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup. (p. 187)
  • Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct". (1 p. 125)
  • These cannot be selected when sound mode is "DTS Virtual:X" or sound mode that have "+Virtual:X" in the sound mode name.
    • These cannot be selected when using the headphones.

"M-DAX" cannot be selected.

  • Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, "M-DAX" cannot be used. (Kp p. 161)
  • Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct". (125)

No sound is output when using ZONE2.

• Digital signal audio input from the HDMI connector or digital audio connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) cannot be played back. Use analog connections.
- When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2, remove any obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 30 m.

Sound mode settings are not available when using Bluetooth headphones. Audio menu settings are also not available.

- This unit cannot change sound mode or audio menu settings for audio output to Bluetooth headphones.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

241

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Sound is interrupted or noise occurs

During playback from the Internet radio or USB memory device, sound is occasionally interrupted.

  • When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted.
  • The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy.

When making a call on iPhone, noise occurs in audio output on this unit.

- When making a call, keep a distance of 20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit.

Noise often occurs in FM/AM broadcasting.

  • Change the antenna orientation or position. (☐ p. 63)
  • Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.
  • Use an outdoor antenna. (p. 63)
  • Separate the antenna from other connection cables. (1) p. 63)

The sounds appear to be distorted.

  • Lower the volume. (10 p. 72)
  • Set "Off" to the "ECO Mode". When "On" or "Auto" is in the "ECO Mode", the audio may by distorted when the playback volume is high. (17 p. 216)

Sound cuts out when using Wi-Fi connection.

- The frequency band used by the wireless LAN is also used by microwave ovens, cordless telephones, wireless game controllers and other wireless LAN devices. Using such devices at the same time as this unit may cause sound to cut out due to electronic interference. Sound cut out can be improved using the following methods. (17 p. 65)

  • Install devices that cause interference away from this unit.
  • Turn off the power supply to devices that cause interference.
  • Change the settings of the router channel to which this unit is connected to. (See the instruction manual of the wireless router for details on how to change the channel.)
  • Switch to a wired LAN connection.
  • Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection. (p. 209)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

242

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound is interrupted or noise occurs - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound is interrupted or noise occurs - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Sound is interrupted or noise occurs - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

No video is shown on the TV

No picture appears.

  • Check the connections for all devices. (☐ p. 53)
  • Insert connection cables all the way in.
  • Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.
  • Check cables for damage.
  • Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. (1 p. 183)
  • Check that the proper input source is selected. (17 p. 71)
  • Check the video input connector setting. (p. 183)
  • Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. (195 p. 227)
  • Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly. (1 p. 261)
    • To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3.
  • To play back a 4K video, use a “High Speed HDMI Cable” or an “High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet”. In order to achieve a higher fidelity for 4K videos, it is recommended to use a “Premium High Speed HDMI Cables” or an “Premium High Speed HDMI Cables with Ethernet” that has an HDMI Premium Certified Cable label on the product package.
  • Use an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable" to enjoy 8K or 4K 120Hz video.

No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection.

- With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the copy guard copyright protection (HDCP). (12 p. 261)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

243

MARANTZ NR1711 - No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection. - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV.

- The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during playback of the following video signals.

  • Some images of 3D video contents
  • Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
  • Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
  • 4K or 8K video
  • Some kind of HDR signals
  • Some kind of game contents
  • Compressed video
  • HDMI input connector 5 or 6 is selected

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

244

MARANTZ NR1711 - While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV. - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

The menu screen is not displayed on the TV

The menu screen or status information screen is not displayed on the TV.

  • The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is connected to a TV using a different video output connector, operate while watching the display on this unit.
  • The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.

- Some images of 3D video content

- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)

- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3

- Some kind of HDR signals

- Some kind of game contents

- Compressed video

- 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, when HDMI input connector 5 or 6 is selected

  • When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is not displayed properly. (197 p. 228)
  • In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a sound mode other than the pure direct mode. (124)
  • Set the "TV Format" setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV. (17 p. 182)

The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal

The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different.

- Performing operations on this unit during playback of a Dolby Vision signal may cause variance in the color display of the menu screen and operations content. This is a characteristic of the Dolby Vision signal and is not a malfunction.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

245

MARANTZ NR1711 - The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

AirPlay cannot be played back

The AirPlay icon is not displayed on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

  • This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to the same LAN as this unit. (1 p. 65)
  • The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to the latest version.

Audio is not output.

  • The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level.
  • The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon on the iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this unit. (p. 111)

Audio is interrupted during the AirPlay playback on iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

  • Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using AirPlay.
  • Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by taking measures such as shortening the distance from the wireless LAN access point.

iTunes cannot be played back through the remote control unit.

- Enable the “Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers” setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform playback, pause, and skip operations through the remote control unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

246

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio is not output. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio is not output. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio is not output. - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

USB memory devices cannot be played back

USB memory device is not recognized.

  • Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. (☐ p. 62)
  • Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported.
  • This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port.
  • The USB memory device must be formatted to "FAT32" or "NTFS".
  • Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized. When using a type of portable hard disc drive compatible with the USB connection that requires power from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.

Files on the USB memory device are not displayed.

  • Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (p. 73)
  • This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can also be displayed for each layer. Modify the folder structure of the USB memory device.
  • When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed.

iOS and Android devices are not recognized.

- The USB port of this unit does not support playback from iOS and Android devices.

Files on a USB memory device cannot be played.

  • Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. (1 p. 264)
  • You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
  • Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

247

MARANTZ NR1711 - Files on a USB memory device cannot be played. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Files on a USB memory device cannot be played. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Files on a USB memory device cannot be played. - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Bluetooth cannot be played back

Bluetooth devices cannot be connected to this unit.

  • The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner's Manual of the Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function.
  • Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.
  • The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile.
  • Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again.

Smartphones and other Bluetooth devices cannot be connected.

- Smartphones and other Bluetooth devices cannot be connected when "Transmitter" is set to "On". Press Bluetooth on the remote control to switch the input source to Bluetooth, then connect the device. (127 p. 220)

Cannot connect Bluetooth headphones.

  • Bring the Bluetooth headphones near to this unit.
  • Turn the power of the Bluetooth headphones off and on again, and then try again.
  • Go to "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter", and set "Transmitter" to "On" within the menu. (p. 220)
  • Make sure this unit is not already connected to another pair of Bluetooth headphones. Check the currently connected Bluetooth headphones by pressing INFO on the remote control or STATUS button on the unit. Disconnect the connected Bluetooth headphones before connecting the ones you want to use.
  • Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected if Bluetooth is being used as an input source in any zone.
  • Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected if this unit is grouped in the HEOS App. Remove this unit from the group to enable Bluetooth headphones connection.
  • The Bluetooth headphones cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile.
  • Connection and operation are not guaranteed for all Bluetooth-enabled devices.
  • This unit can only connect to one Bluetooth headphone at a time. However, up to 8 Bluetooth headphones can be registered. You can switch between registered devices from "Device List" in the "Bluetooth Transmitter" menu. (129 p. 220)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

248

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cannot connect Bluetooth headphones. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cannot connect Bluetooth headphones. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cannot connect Bluetooth headphones. - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

The sound is cut off.

  • Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.
  • Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit.
    • To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices.
  • Reconnect the Bluetooth device.

The sound is cut off or noise occurs when using Bluetooth headphones.

  • Move the Bluetooth headphones closer to this unit.
  • Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth headphones and this unit.
  • Reconnect the Bluetooth headphones.
    • To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices.
  • We recommend using wired LAN to connect this unit and other devices.
  • Bluetooth transmits on the 2.4 GHz band which may interfere with Wi-Fi transmitted on this band. Connect this unit and other devices to Wi-Fi network on a 5 GHz band if available on your Wi-Fi router.

Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones.

- This unit cannot adjust audio delay on Bluetooth headphones.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones. - 3

249

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones. - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones. - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones. - 6

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

The Internet radio cannot be played back

A list of broadcasting stations is not displayed.

  • The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. (Lp 65)
  • Perform the network diagnostic mode.

Internet Radio cannot be played.

  • The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and AAC. (127 p. 267)
  • The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting.
    • The IP address is not properly set. (p. 211)
  • Check the power of the router is on.
  • To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the DHCP setting to "On" on this unit. (p. 211)
  • To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address on this unit. (p. 211)
  • Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a while and select the same radio station, or select another radio station. (12 p. 96)
  • The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service.

Cannot connect to favorite radio stations.

- Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

250

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cannot connect to favorite radio stations. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cannot connect to favorite radio stations. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cannot connect to favorite radio stations. - 3

Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back

Files stored on a computer cannot be played.

  • Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. (p. 266)
  • Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
  • The USB port of this unit cannot be used for connection to a computer.
  • Media sharing settings on the server or NAS do not allow this unit. Change the settings to allow this unit. For details, see the owner's manual of the server or NAS.

Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server.

  • The computer's or router's firewall is activated. Check the computer's or router's firewall settings.
  • Computer's power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
  • Server is not running. Launch the server.
  • IP address of this unit is wrong. Check the IP address of this unit. (19 p. 208)

Music files on PC cannot be played back.

- Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC to this unit through the network. (p. 65)

Files on PC or NAS are not displayed.

- Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (p. 266)

Music stored on a NAS cannot be played.

  • If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS setting.
  • If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows Media Player's media sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.
  • If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

251

MARANTZ NR1711 - Music stored on a NAS cannot be played. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Music stored on a NAS cannot be played. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Music stored on a NAS cannot be played. - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Various online services cannot be played

Various online services cannot be played.

- The online service may have been discontinued.

The HDMI Control function does not work

The HDMI Control function does not work.

  • Check that "HDMI Control" in the menu is set to "On". (☐ p. 172)
  • You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI Control function. In addition, depending on the connected device or the settings, the HDMI Control function may not work. In this case, operate the external device directly. (17 p. 135)
  • Check that the HDMI Control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. (p. 135)
  • When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on again. (15 p. 135)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

252

MARANTZ NR1711 - The HDMI Control function does not work - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - The HDMI Control function does not work - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - The HDMI Control function does not work - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network

Cannot connect to the network.

  • The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the network settings according to the setting details of this unit. (p. 210)
  • Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access first before re-connecting again. Place the unit away from microwave ovens and other network access points.
  • Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks.
  • This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN).

Cannot connect to a WPS Router.

  • Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating.
  • Press the WPS button on the router and then press the "Connect" button displayed on the TV within 2 minutes.
  • A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to "None", "WPA-PSK (AES)" or WPA2-PSK (AES). (18) p. 210)
  • If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS button on the router. In this case, use the "Scan Networks" or "Manual" method to connect.

Cannot connect to the network using iPhone/iPod touch/iPad.

  • Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version.
  • When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

253

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cannot connect to the network using iPhone/iPod touch/iPad. - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cannot connect to the network using iPhone/iPod touch/iPad. - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Cannot connect to the network using iPhone/iPod touch/iPad. - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Update/upgrade error messages

If an update/upgrade is interrupted or fails, an error message appears.

Display Description
Connection failed. Please check your network, then try again.The network connection is unstable.Connection to the server failed.Check your network environment and try the update again.
Update failed. Please check your network, then try again.The download of the firmware failed.Check your network environment and try the update again.
Upgrade failed. Please check your network, then try again.The download of the firmware failed.Check your network environment and try the upgrade again.
Please check your network, unplug and reconnect the power cord, and try again.The update failed.Press and hold the ⏻ on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord.The update restarts automatically.
Please contact customer service in your area. This unit may be broken.Contact our Customer Service Center in your area.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

254

MARANTZ NR1711 - Update/upgrade error messages - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Update/upgrade error messages - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Update/upgrade error messages - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Resetting factory settings

If the indicators are incorrect or the unit cannot be operated, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (p. 235)

If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below.

Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.

M-DAX ZONE2 SOURCE

1 Turn off the power using ⏻.
2 Press ⏻ while simultaneously pressing M-DAX and ZONE2 SOURCE.
3 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when "Initialized" appears on the display.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Resetting factory settings - 2

  • Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (P p. 229)
  • You can also reset all settings to the factory defaults using "Reset" - "All Settings" in the menu. (1 p. 230)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

255

MARANTZ NR1711 - Resetting factory settings - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Resetting factory settings - 4

MARANTZ NR1711 - Resetting factory settings - 5

Contents Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Resetting network settings

If network contents cannot be played or the unit cannot connect to the network, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (167 p. 235)

If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below.

Network settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.

However, the menu "Amp Assign", "Speaker Config." and "Video" settings are not reset.

INPUT SELECTOR DIMMER ZONE2 SOURCE

1 Press ⏻ to turn on power to the unit.
2 Turn INPUT SELECTOR to select "HEOS Music".
3 Press and hold the main unit's ZONE2 SOURCE and DIMMER at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
4 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when "Network Reset..." appears on the display.
5 "Completed" is shown in the display when reset is complete.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Resetting network settings - 2

  • Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (19 p. 229)
  • You can also reset the network settings to the factory defaults using "Reset" - "Network Settings" in the menu. (p. 230)

NOTE

- Do not turn the power off until reset is complete.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

256

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Restoring the firmware to the factory defaults

When the unit or the network functions do not work properly, operation may be improved by restoring the firmware to the factory defaults.

Do this when the unit still does not work properly even after trying the steps for “Resetting factory settings” or “Resetting network settings”. (127 p. 255, 256)

After the firmware is restored, various settings are reset to the default settings. Configure the settings and update the firmware again.

PURE DIRECT STATUS

1 Press ⏻ while simultaneously pressing PURE DIRECT and STATUS.
2 When "Restoring FW..." appears on the display, release the buttons.

When the firmware restore is complete, "Completed" appears on the display for about 5 seconds, and the unit automatically restarts.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Restoring the firmware to the factory defaults - 2

  • This operation takes time because it requires reconnecting to the network, restoring and updating the firmware.
  • If this operation does not improve the problem, contact our customer service center.

NOTE

- Do not turn off the power until the firmware restore is complete.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

257

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - NOTE - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

About HDMI

HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier. With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not possible with the analog video transmission. Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system. This unit supports the following HDMI functions.

- Deep Color

An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr, which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024 shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce colors in higher definition. Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.

• x.v.Color

This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid colors. "x.v.Color" is trademark of Sony Corporation.

• 3D

This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.

• 4K / 8K

This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) and 8K (7680 x 4320 pixels) video signals of HDMI.

- Content Type

It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type (content information).

- Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color

The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.

- sYCC601 color

Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.

• ALLM (Auto Low Latency Mode)

This unit automatically switches to low latency mode depending on playback contents when using a combination of television and game console compatible with the ALLM function.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

258

MARANTZ NR1711 - • ALLM (Auto Low Latency Mode) - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - • ALLM (Auto Low Latency Mode) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - • ALLM (Auto Low Latency Mode) - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

- Auto Lip Sync

This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and video.

Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.

- HDMI Pass Through

Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is connected to the HDMI output connector.

- HDMI Control

If you connect the unit and an HDMI Control function compatible TV or player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI Control function setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.

- Power off link

This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.

• Audio output destination switching

From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or the AV amplifier.

• Volume adjustment

You can adjust this unit's volume in the TV volume adjustment operation.

- Input source switching

You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input switching.

When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the source for that player.

• ARC (Audio Return Channel)

This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit based on the HDMI Control function.

If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate audio cable connection is required.

In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback on this unit for the TV.

• eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)

The eARC function is an extension of the conventional ARC function. It utilizes dedicated eARC function control to play back television audio from this unit without passing through HDMI control. Furthermore, the eARC function can transmit multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio formats not compatible with conventional ARC. Connecting to an eARC function-compatible television also enables enjoyment of higher-quality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Index - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

• VRR (Variable Refresh Rate):

VRR reduces or eliminates lag, stutter and frame tearing for more fluid and better detailed gameplay.

• QMS (Quick Media Switching):

QMS for movies and video eliminates the delay that can result in blank screens before content is displayed.

• QFT (Quick Frame Transport):

QFT reduces latency for smoother no-lag gaming, and real-time interactive virtual reality.

■ Supported audio formats

2-channel Linear PCM2-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Multi-channel Linear PCM7.1-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
BitstreamDolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS:X / DTS-HD Master Audio / DTS-HD High Resolution Audio / DTS Express

■ Supported video signals

• 480i

• 480p

• 576i

• 576p

- 720p 60/50Hz

• 1080i 60/50Hz

• 1080p 60/50/24Hz

• 4K 120/100/60/50/30/25/24 Hz

• 8K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

260

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Supported video signals - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Supported video signals - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Supported video signals - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
- If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read the owner's manual of your television or player for more information.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

261

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Relationship between video signals and monitor output
MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 4

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Video device"] --> B["Output"]
    B --> C["HDMI signal"]
    C --> D["Input (IN)"]
    D --> E["Output (MONITOR OUT)"]
    E --> F["HDMI signal"]
    F --> G["Component video signal"]
    G --> H["Component video connectors"]
    H --> I["Component video connectors"]
    I --> J["Component video connectors"]
    J --> K["Component video connectors"]
    K --> L["Component video connectors"]
    L --> M["Component video connectors"]
    M --> N["Component video connectors"]
    N --> O["Component video connectors"]
    O --> P["Component video connectors"]
    P --> Q["Component video connectors"]
    Q --> R["Component video connectors"]
    R --> S["Component video connectors"]
    S --> T["Component video connectors"]
    T --> U["Component video connectors"]
    U --> V["Component video connectors"]
    V --> W["Component video connectors"]
    W --> X["Component video connectors"]
    X --> Y["Component video connectors"]
    Y --> Z["Component video connectors"]
    Z --> AA["Component video connectors"]
    AA --> AB["Component video connectors"]
    AB --> AC["Component video connectors"]
    AC --> AD["Component video connectors"]
    AD --> AE["Component video connectors"]
    AE --> AF["Component video connectors"]
    AF --> AG["Component video connectors"]
    AG --> AH["Component video connectors"]
    AH --> AI["Component video connectors"]
    AI --> AJ["Component video connectors"]
    AJ --> AK["Component video connectors"]
    AK --> AL["Component video connectors"]
    AL --> AM["Component video connectors"]
    AM --> AN["Component video connectors"]
    AN --> AO["Component video connectors"]
    AO --> AP["Component video connectors"]
    AP --> AQ["Component video connectors"]
    AQ --> AR["Component video connectors"]
    AR --> AS["Component video connectors"]
    AS --> AT["Component video connectors"]
    AT --> AU["Component video connectors"]
    AU --> AV["Component video connectors"]
    AV --> AW["Component video connectors"]
    AW --> AX["Component video connectors"]
    AX --> AY["Component video connectors"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

262

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 6

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 7

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for "Resolution" in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (125 p. 176)

Input signal\Output signalHDMI
480i/576i480p/576p720p 1080i1080p30/25/24Hz1080p60/50Hz4K30/25/24Hz4K60/50Hz4K120/100Hz8K30/25/24Hz8K60/50Hz
HDMI480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p 30/25/24Hz
1080p 60/50Hz
4K 30/25/24Hz
4K 60/50Hz
4K 120/100Hz√*
8K 30/25/24Hz√*
8K 60/50Hz√*

* Only supported by the HDMI 6 connector.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 8

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 9

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 10

263

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 11

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 12

MARANTZ NR1711 - Copyright protection system - 13

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a USB memory devices

  • This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
  • This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
  • This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
  • If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played back properly.

■ Compatible formats

Sampling frequency Channel Bit rate Extension
WMA*132/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz2-channel – .wav
MPEG-4 AAC*132/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 - 320 kbps .aac/.m4a
FLAC44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz2-channel – .flac
Apple Lossless*244.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz2-channel – .m4a
DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz 2-channel –.dsf/.diff

*1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.

*2 The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

264

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing back a USB memory devices - 1

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

■ Maximum number of playable files and folder

The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by this unit are as follows.

Item\MediaUSB memory device
Number of folder directory levels *18 levels
Number of folders 500
Number of files*25000

*1 The limited number includes the root folder.
*2 The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device capacity and the file size.

Playing back a Bluetooth device

This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile.

  • A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile): When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality.
  • AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile): When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.

■ About Bluetooth communications

Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference may cause malfunctions.

  • Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable gases are generated
    • Near automatic doors and fire alarms

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

265

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ About Bluetooth communications - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ About Bluetooth communications - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ About Bluetooth communications - 3

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS

  • This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
  • This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
  • This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
  • If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played back properly.
  • A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
    For playing mentioned audio formats via a network a server software, for example Twonky Media Server or jRiver Media Server, needs to be installed on your computer or NAS for full support. There are other server software available too. Please check supported formats.

■ Specifications of supported files

Sampling frequency Channel Bit rate Extension
WMA*132/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz2-channel – .wav
MPEG-4 AAC*132/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 - 320 kbps .aac/.m4a
FLAC44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz2-channel – .flac
Apple Lossless*244.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz2-channel – .m4a
DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz 2-channel – .dsf/.dff

*1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.

*2 The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

266

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS - 1

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

Playing back Internet Radio

■ Playable broadcast station specifications

Sampling frequencyBit rateExtension
WMA 32/44.1/48 kHz48 – 192 kbps.wma
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz32 – 320 kbps.mp3
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz48 - 320 kbps.aac/.m4a

Personal memory plus function

The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ ^® , Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume, M-DAX and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Personal memory plus function - 1

- "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.

Last function memory

This function stores the settings which were made before going into the standby mode.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

267

MARANTZ NR1711 - Last function memory - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Last function memory - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Last function memory - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

Explanation of terms

Audyssey

Audyssey Dynamic EQ®

Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ ^® to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.

Audyssey Dynamic Volume®

Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.

Audyssey MultEQ®

Audyssey MultEQ ^® is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ ^® calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

268

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audyssey MultEQ® - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audyssey MultEQ® - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Audyssey MultEQ® - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Dolby

Dolby Atmos

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby Atmos Stream

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos Enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories.

A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels ("FL", "FR" and "C"), 2 surround channels ("SL" and "SR") and the "LFE" channel for low frequency effects.

Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround sound experience in the home.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback device.

Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby Surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

269

MARANTZ NR1711 - Dolby Surround - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Dolby Surround - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Dolby Surround - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers)

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. These speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing. These features can be built into a conventional speaker or standalone speaker module. The features minimally impact the overall speaker footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby Surround playback.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master.

This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.

Speaker Virtualizer

Dolby Atmos height virtualization is a digital signal processing solution that leverages Dolby's deep understanding of human audio perception to create the sensation of overhead sound from the listener-level speakers.

This signal processing applies height-cue filters to overhead audio components contained within the audio signal before they are mixed into the listener-level speakers.

These filters simulate the natural spectral cues imparted by our ears to sounds that originate from overhead.

For stereo and 3.1-channel speaker configuration, Dolby Atmos height virtualization is combined with surround virtualization to create an enveloping 360-degree audio minus the speakers that would ordinarily be employed behind or to the side of the listener.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

270

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker Virtualizer - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker Virtualizer - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Speaker Virtualizer - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

DTS

Dialog Control

Gives you control of the listening experience. You can lift the dialog out from the background sounds when clarity and intelligibility are desired. This requires that content has been authored to support Dialog Control.

DTS

This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic surround sound experience, and is found in the world's finest movie theaters and screening rooms.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS ^™ Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1

DTS-ES ^™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS Express

DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1-channels, 24 to 256 kbps).

DTS-HD

This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray Disc.

This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are supported in Blu-ray Disc.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

271

MARANTZ NR1711 - DTS-HD - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - DTS-HD - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - DTS-HD - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS:X

DTS:X produces a hemisphere of audio, where flyovers as well as ambient backgrounds become truly enveloping. DTS:X objects enable audio to move smoothly from one speaker to any other creating life-like realism.

DTS Neural:X

Enables an immersive audio experience for older content. DTS Neural:X can upmix your stereo, 5.1 or 7.1 content to take full advantage of all speakers in your surround sound system.

DTS Virtual:X

DTS Virtual:X allows you to enjoy multi-dimensional sound regardless of room size, layout, or speaker configuration.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

272

MARANTZ NR1711 - DTS Virtual:X - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - DTS Virtual:X - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - DTS Virtual:X - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Audio

Apple Lossless Audio Codec

This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data compressed to approximately 60 – 70 % can be decompressed to exactly the same original data.

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)

FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss in quality.

The FLAC license is as shown below.

Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Josh Coalson

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

  • Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
  • Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
  • Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

LFE

This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system subwoofer(s).

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)

This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme, using the "MPEG-1" video compression standard. It compresses the data volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

273

MARANTZ NR1711 - MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4

These are the names for digital compression format standards used for the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include "MPEG-1 Video", "MPEG-2 Video", "MPEG-4 Visual", "MPEG-4 AVC". Audio standards include "MPEG-1 Audio", "MPEG-2 Audio", "MPEG-4 AAC".

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation.

WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media ^® Player.

To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work properly.

Sampling frequency

Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in digitized format (producing a digital signal).

The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the original.

Speaker impedance

This is an AC resistance value, indicated in (ohms).

Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.

Dialogue normalization function

This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources. It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources.

Dynamic range

The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.

Downmix

This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a lower number of channels and plays back according to the system's configuration.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

274

MARANTZ NR1711 - Downmix - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Downmix - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Downmix - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Video

ISF

ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the optimization of device video performance.

Progressive (sequential scanning)

This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides images with less flickering and jagged edges.

Network

AirPlay

AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.

WEP Key (network key)

This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them.

Wi-Fi®

Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)

This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security.

WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)

This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, compatible with more secure AES encryption.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

275

MARANTZ NR1711 - WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)

This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client.

Network Names (SSID: Service Set Identifier)

When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on “SSID (network names)”. For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication is unavailable unless both the “SSID” and the WEP key match. This is suitable for constructing a simplified network.

Others

HDCP

When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being copied without authorization.

MAIN ZONE

The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.

Pairing

Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections occurring.

When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.

Protection circuit

This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over temperature for any reason.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

276

MARANTZ NR1711 - Protection circuit - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Protection circuit - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Protection circuit - 3

Trademark information

MARANTZ NR1711 - Trademark information - 1

Works with

Apple AirPlay

Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

The trademark "iPhone" is used in Japan with a license from Aiphone K.K.

Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

AUDYSSEY

MULTEQ

DYNAMIC VOLUME

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ®, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume® are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.

MARANTZ NR1711 - AUDYSSEY - 1

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth ^® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth - 1

DOLBY

ATMOS

COMPATIBLE

DOLBY

VISION

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Audio, Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

277

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth - 3

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth - 4

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth - 5

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth - 6

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together, DTS:X, the DTS:X logo, Virtual:X, and the DTS Virtual:X logo are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth - 7

HIGH DEFINITION MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE

The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

HDR10+TM logo is a trademark of HDR10+ Technologies, LLC.

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth - 8

CERTIFIED

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

278

MARANTZ NR1711 - CERTIFIED - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - CERTIFIED - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - CERTIFIED - 3

Specifications

■ Audio section

- Power amplifier

Rated output: Front:

50 W + 50 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)

70 W + 70 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Center:

50 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)

70 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Surround:

50 W + 50 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)

70 W + 70 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Surround back:

50 W + 50 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)

70 W + 70 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Output connectors: 4 – 16 Ω/ohms

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

279

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Audio section - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Audio section - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Audio section - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

- Analog

Input sensitivity: 130 mV

Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, -3 dB (Direct mode)

S/N: 98 dB (IHF-A weighted, Direct mode)

- Phono equalizer

Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV

RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

S/N: 74 dB (IHF-A)

Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)

■ Video section

- Standard video connectors

Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, -3 dB

• Color component video connector

Input/output level and impedance: Y signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

P_B/C_B signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

P_R/C_R signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, -3 dB

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

280

MARANTZ NR1711 - • Color component video connector - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - • Color component video connector - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - • Color component video connector - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

■ Tuner section

[FM] [AM]

(Note: V at 75 /ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10^-15 W)

Reception frequency range: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz 522 kHz – 1611 kHz

Effective sensitivity: 1.2 μV (12.8 dBf) 18 μV

50 dB sensitivity: MONO - 2.8 μV (20.2 dBf)

S/N ratio: MONO - 70 dB (IHF-A weighted, Direct mode)

STEREO - 67 dB (IHF-A weighted, Direct mode)

Distortion: MONO - 0.7 % (1 kHz)

STEREO - 1.0 % (1 kHz)

■ Wireless LAN section

Network type (wireless LAN standard): Conforming to IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n

(Wi-Fi® compliant) *1

Security: WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit

WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES)

WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)

Used frequency range: 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz

*1 The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

281

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Wireless LAN section - 1

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Bluetooth section

Communications system: Bluetooth Specification Version 4.2

Transmission power: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 1

Maximum communication range: Approx. 30 m in line of sight *2

Used frequency range: 2.4 GHz

Modulation scheme: FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum)

Supported profiles: Receiver function

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2

AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.5

Transmitter function

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2

Corresponding codec: SBC

Transmission range (A2DP): 20 Hz – 20,000 Hz

*2 The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

282

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth section - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth section - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - Bluetooth section - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

General

Operating temperature: 5 °C - 35 °C

Power supply: AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption: 250 W

Power consumption in standby modes:

Standby modesSetting items in the menuPower consumption
Network Control (p. 213)Allow Update (p. 225)HDMI Pass Through (p. 170) / HDMI Control (p. 172)
Normal standby Off In Standby Off Off 0.1 W
Network control (Bluetooth) Always On - Off 3.3 W
Network control (Ethernet) Always On - Off 3.4 W
Network control (Wi-Fi) Always On - Off 3.7 W
CEC standby Off In Standby Off On 0.5 W

For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

283

Remote

Index

MARANTZ NR1711 - General - 1

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

■ Dimensions (Unit : mm)

34 328 378 16 85 210 350 55 440 91 105 173 14 50 50 340 55

■ Weight : 8.3 kg

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

284

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Weight : 8.3 kg - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Weight : 8.3 kg - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - ■ Weight : 8.3 kg - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Index

Numerics

3D 258

4K/8K 258

5.1-channel 33,41

7.1-channel 33,42

A

AirPlay 110

All Zone Stereo 121

Audio formats 260, 264, 266, 267

Audio settings 152, 157

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® 268

Audyssey Dynamic Volume® 268

Audyssey MultEQ® 268

Audyssey settings 164, 189

Audyssey® Setup 187

Auto sound mode 126

Auto Standby 219

B

Bi-amp 48

Bluetooth device 78

Blu-ray Disc player 58,72

C

Cable TV 57

D

Direct sound mode 130

Display 19

Dolby Atmos 269

Dolby sound mode 127, 269

DTS sound mode 128, 271

DVD player 58,72

E

ECO Mode 216

External control device 67

F

Firmware Update 224

FM/AM antenna 63,85

Front panel 16

G

Game console 60

General settings 155, 216

H

HDCP 261

HDMI Control 135, 172

HEOS Account 102,215

HEOS Favorites 115

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

285

MARANTZ NR1711 - H - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - H - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - H - 3

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

1

Input Assign 183

Input settings 153, 183

Input source 71

Internet Radio 95

L

Listening position 187

M

M-DAX 161

Menu map 152

Muting 72

N

NAS 97

Network settings 208

0

Original sound mode 129

P

Pairing 78,79

PC 97

PCM multi-channel sound mode 129

Picture Mode 168

Protection circuit 276

Pure direct 125

Q

Queue 74, 98, 105

R

Rear panel 21

Remote control unit 25

Resetting factory settings 255

Resetting network settings 256

S

Satellite tuner 57

Set-top box 57

Setup Assistant 155

Sleep timer 138

Smart select 140

Sound mode 124

Speaker connection 36

Speaker settings 153, 187

Spotify 113

Stereo sound mode 130

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

286

MARANTZ NR1711 - S - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - S - 2

MARANTZ NR1711 - S - 3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

T

Tips 233

Troubleshooting 235

TV 53, 54, 55

U

USB memory device 62,73

V

Video camcorder 60

Video Select 119

Video settings 152, 168

Volume 72,117

W

Web control 146

Wi-Fi settings 209

Wired LAN 65,208

Wireless LAN 66,209

Z

ZONE2 50,148

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

287

MARANTZ NR1711 - Z - 1

MARANTZ NR1711 - Z - 2

www.marantz.com

You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.

marantz® is a registered trademark.

3520 10730 00AMA

©2020 Sound United. All Rights Reserved.

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : MARANTZ

Model : NR1711

Category : Home Theater